330
NCopy 3 FM 22-5 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL DRILL AND CEREMONIES HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY JULY 1964 WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.CO

3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

NCopy 3 FM 22-5DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

DRILL ANDCEREMONIES

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

JULY 1964

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.CO

Page 2: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

*FM 22-5

FIELD MANUAL HEADQUARTERSDEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 22-5 WASHINGTON, D.C., 15 July, 1964

DRILL AND CEREMONIES

Paragraphs Page

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION

Section I. General ______-_------------ 1-3 3II. Drill instruction ------------ 4-6 6

CHAPTER 2. COMMANDS AND THE

COMMAND VOICE

Section I. Commands ______-_--------- 7-9 12II. The command voice -------- 10-17 14

CHAPTER 3. SCHOOLING OF THE SOL-

DIER WITHOUT ARMS__ 18-35 23

4. SCHOOLING OF THE SOL-DIER WITH ARMS

Section I. Manual of arms for the M14rifle --------------------- 36-49 40

II. Manual of arms for the .45caliber pistol ------------ 50-52 80

III. Manual of arms for the gre-nade launcher, M79 -----____ 53-55 84

IV. Manual of the guidon -_____ 56-60 86

CHAPTER 5. THE SQUAD

Section I. General _______.. ____________ 61-63 100II. Squad drill ______________-_ 64-75 103

*This manual supersedes FM 22-5, 29 August 1958, including

C 1, 8 April 1960, and C 2, 4 April 1961.

1

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS

Page 3: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 6. THE PLATOON Paragraphs Page

Section I. General ---_---------------- 76-80 126II. Platoon drill --_----_------- 81-88 132

CHAPTER 7. THE COMPANY

Section I. General ---_---_------------ 89, 90 142II. Company drill _______--- __-- 91-104 150

CHAPTER 8. INSPECTIONS -_-__--- __-- 105-107 162

9. THE BATTALION ANDTHE BRIGADE

Section I. General -----------------_-- 108-110 174II. The battalion -__--_-------- 111-116 178

III. The brigade -_____--_ ____-- 117-119 184

CHAPTER 10. CEREMONIES

Section I. Reviews ------------------- 120-127 189II. Parades ___--__---_ __--- _-- 128-131 211

III. Escorts and honor guards___ 132,133 218IV. Colors ---------_----------- 134-141 223V. Funerals -_________-______-_ 142-157 230

CHAPTER 11. MOUNTED DRILL

Section I. General ---_--__--- -________ 158-171 248II. Movement of vehicles ---__- 172-177 257

III. Signals ---_---__-- _______-- 178, 179 263IV. Mounted reviews -_________- 180-185 267V. Inspection of mounted units_ 186, 187 274

APPENDIX I. REFERENCES _--________- -_--___ 278

II. SYMBOLS _________________ _______ 279

III MANUAL OF ARMS FORTHE M1 RIFLE _______- _______ 280

IV. MANUAL OF ARMS FORTHE CARBINE ____-____ _______ 314

V. MANUAL OF ARMS FORTHE BROWNING AUTO-MATIC RIFLE __________ _______ 320

INDEX -____--------------------------- -------___ 323

2

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 4: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

1. Purpose and Scopea. This manual presents army drill and cere-

monies. It explains the techniques for teachingdrill and ceremonies; the methods for developingthe command voice; the schooling of the soldierwithout arms; the manual of arms for the rifles M1and M14, Browning automatic rifle, .45 caliber pis-tol, carbine, and M79 grenade launcher; the man-ual of the guidon; unit drill through units ofbrigade size; and ceremonies, inspections, andmounted drill.

b. The material in this manual is applicable toboth nonnuclear and nuclear warfare.

c. Users of this manual are encouraged to sub-mit recommended changes or comments to improvethe manual. Comments should be keyed to the spe-cific page, paragraph, and line of text in which thechange is recommended. Reasons should be pro-vided for each comment to insure understandingand complete evaluation. Comments should be for-warded direct to the Commandant, U.S. Army In-fantry School, Fort Benning, Ga.

3

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 5: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

2. Drill Terms, Symbols, Capitalization

a. Drill Termns. Drill terms used in this manualusually appear at the beginning of each chapter inwhich they are first used.

b. Symbol Keys. Symbol keys accompany fig-ures, and a reference key for all symbols appear inappendix II, figure 75.

c. Capitalization. For ease in distinguishing thefive types of commands (para. 7-9), they areprinted in this manual as follows:

(1) Preparatory commands are in SMALL CAPI-

TAL letters.(2) Commands of execution, LARGE CAPI-

TAL letters.(3) Combined commands, LARGE CAPITAL

letters.(4) Supplementary commands, SMALL CAPLTAL

letters.(5) Directives, LARGE CAPITAL letters.

3. Drill and Ceremonies

a. During his first few weeks in the Army thesoldier often asks, "Why are drill and ceremoniesneeded? Why couldn't I use my time more advan-tageously learning how to fire my weapon?" Theanswers are that individual efforts alone do notbring survival or victory for the soldier; that thesoldier has to learn teamwork and the value ofunified and cooperative action so thoroughly thatthey guide his later actions instinctively. The firstopportunity that the Army has to build the spiritof teamwork is on the parade ground. Here, allsoldiers learn that there can be no orderly move-

4

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS

Page 6: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

ment of men or units without a precise and unifiedeffort, and every man learns to play his part in thesquad, platoon, or company. The commands fordrill and ceremonies takes on a meaning similar tothe signals barked out by the quarterback on a foot-ball team. After a short time the soldier knowswhat to do in response to a command. He alsoknows what his friends will do and his confidencegrows in himself and his friends. Teamwork re-sults, unit pride grows, and a solid foundation isestablished for further training of all types.

b. Drill consists of certain movements by whichthe squad, platoon, or company is moved in anorderly manner from one formation to another orfrom one place to another. These movements areexecuted with order and precision. Each memberof the squad does his part with exactness so thaton command the squad moves instantly, smartly,and smoothly. The men are trained to stand, stepoff, march, halt, and to handle the rifle smoothlyas individuals and in unison as members of thesquad.

c. Drill training begins the day the soldier entersthe Army. In the beginning, he is taught individu-ally the foot movements and the manual of arms.Immediately following this instruction, he prac-tices these movements while marching, halting, andin combination with the handling of his weapon.He repeats the exercises until he can perform themsmartly and automatically in response to a com-mand. He is then placed in a squad and trainedto do all these movements together with other men.His squad is then placed in a platoon with other

5

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 7: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

squads and he learns other movements. Finally, hetakes his place in companies and brigades.

d. Ceremonies are formations and movements inwhich a large number of troops execute movementsin unison and with precision upon command, justas in drill. Although the colors and the martialmusic add glamor to military ceremonies, theirprimary value is in rendering honors, preservingtraditions, and stimulating esprit de corps. A cere-mony may inspire hundreds or even thousands ofmen to work as a great team, standing at attentionin ranks, making 1,000 rifles click like one, ormarching with machinelike precision. Esprit decorps is generated and every soldier in the unit be-comes proud of himself and his unit as result ofsnappy appearance and precise group performance.

Section II. DRILL INSTRUCTION

4. Conduct of Instruction

a. The progress made by individuals and unitsin precise and unified action in drill and ceremoniesis determined by the following:

(1) The methods of instruction and the thor-oughness of the instructors.

(2) The organization of training groups intounits of the most effective instructionalsize (c below).

b. The step-by-step method is the most effectiveone for instructing in drill and ceremonies. Thesteps are as follows:

(1) Give the name of the movement and itspractical use to the individual or unit.

6

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 8: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

(2) Give the command to be used for the move-ment and explain its elements--the pre-paratory command and the command ofexecution (para. 7).

(3) Explain the movement so that soldiers mayunderstand its pertinent points.

(4) Demonstrate the movement. If it has twoor more counts, the demonstrators executeit by the numbers (para. 5), one count ormovement at a time and in the cadence(quick time, double time) in which it is tobe executed. If the movement is not aprecision movement, the demonstratorstalk through each part of it to acquaintsoldiers with the pertinent points to bepracticed.

(5) Give practical work by the numbers, ortalk the movement through and follow thisby having the movement executed at nor-mal cadence. Instructors and assistant in-structors supervise each movement closelyand have it repeated until precision be-comes habitual.

c. Instruction and practical work in all phasesof the manual of arms, and in the first six para-graphs of chapter 3 are most effectively presentedin the U-formation. In this formation, three squadsare formed, each in line, one to the front and oneon each side of the instructor. If a fourth squadis present, it forms behind and uncovers the squadthat is to the instructor's front.

d. Instruction and practical work in all phasesof squad drill are most effectively presented in

7

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 9: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

training groups of squad size. Instruction in pla-toon drill is best explained and demonstrated bya training group of platoon size. The practicalwork in platoon drill is executed by the platoon asa unit. The practical work in units larger than aplatoon is most effectively conducted when theorganized elements of the unit are left intact fordrill purposes rather than being arbitrarily brokendown into training groups of any given size.

e. Officers, noncommissioned officers, guidon bear-ers, and special units occupy designated posts inthe various formations or units. When changes offormations involve changes of posts, the new postsare taken by the most direct route, except whenotherwise prescribed, and should be taken as soonas practical after the command of execution forthe movement. Officers and noncommissioned offi-cers who have prescribed duties in connection withthe movement take their posts when such duties arecompleted. When executing a facing movement,alining units, or when moving from one post toanother, officers and noncommissioned officers main-tain a military bearing and move with precision.

f. When a noncommissioned officer takes the placeof an officer in commanding a unit, or an elementof a larger unit, he occupies the same post as pre-scribed for the officer. He then carries his rifle atsling arms. At all other times when giving com-mands, making reports, or drilling a unit, a non-commissioned officer, except a squad leader in ranks,carries the rifle and executes movements at rightshoulder arms.

g. When acting as instructors, officers and non-

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 10: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

commissioned officers go wherever their presence isnecessary. They correct mistakes and insure steadi-ness and proper performance in ranks. When anindividual shows clearly that he is unable to exe-cute the proper movements or assume the properposition, the instructor may use his hands to assisthim.

5. Additional Techniques for Drill Instruction

a. By the number is the method by which preci-sion movements of two or more counts are demon-strated, practiced, and learned, one count at a time.This method enables the soldier to learn step-by-step and permits the instructor to make detailedcorrections. The instructor commands BY THENUMBERS before giving the commands for the move-ments. (BY TIlE NUMBERS, ABOUT, FACE.) Thefirst count of the movement is executed on thecommand of execution, FACE. The second countis executed on command, TWO of READY, TWO.

b. All subsequent commands are executed by thenumbers until the command WITHOUT THE NUMBERSis given. For example, in teaching right and leftface, the command BY THE NUMBERS would be givenat the beginning of the practical exercise. Eachfacing is repeated several times by the numbersuntil the instructor gives WITHOUT THE NUMBERS.The same exercises are repeated in the cadence(par. 14) for the movement. Subsequent move-ments are also executed in the cadence for themovement.

c. Talking a movement through is the method bywhich an exercise containing several nonprecision

9

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 11: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

movements is demonstrated, practiced, and learned.Each movement is executed as it is orally described.In FIX BAYONETS, for example, the instructortells the soldier to move the muzzle of the rifle tothe left and grasp it below the stacking swivel withhis left hand. After the soldier executes thesesteps, the instructor tells him to grasp the bayonetin his right hand. After talking the soldierthrough the remaining steps, the instructor hashim practice the movement in normal cadence.

d. Oral examinations are given soldiers at regu-lar intervals throughout their training in drill andceremonies. These examinations are given with theminimum number of students per instructor. Eachsoldier is required to give instruction to other mem-bers of his group as if they had no previous knowl-edge of the subject. The instructor rates the sol-diers for instructional ability and technical knowl-edge. The group of soldiers will find that theyincrease their knowledge of the subject and learnby the repetition required in the examination.

e. Competitive drill exercises are conducted todetermine the best drilled individual and unit with-in larger units. Appropriate prizes are awarded atceremonies to the winners in the competition.

6. Command Voice

Instructors should pay particular attention todeveloping command voice in soldiers. This canbe done by-

a. Setting the example; that is, by giving allcommands to soldiers with the correct voice control,

10

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 12: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

distinctness, inflection, cadence, and snap (para.10-15).

b. Encouraging the members of an instructionalgroup to practice commands with the help of theinstructors.

c. Giving the members of an instructional groupthe opportunity to command.

11

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 13: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 2

COMMANDS AND THE COMMAND VOICE

Section 1. COMMANDS

7. General

A drill command is an oral order of a com-mander. The commander gives all commands tohis unit, except in the few cases mentioned in thismanual.

a. Most drill commands have two parts, knownas the preparatory command and the command ofexecution. Neither of these parts is actually acommand by itself, but they are termed commandsto simplify instruction.

(1) The preparatory command states themovement of formation to be carried outand mentally prepares the individual forits execution. In the command FORWARD,

MARCH, the preparatory command isFORWARD.

(2) The command of execution tells when themovement is to be carried out. In FOR-

WARD, MARCH, the command of executionis MARCH.

b. In some commands, the preparatory commandand the command of execution are combined (com-

12

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 14: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

bined command); for example: FALL IN, CON-TINUE THE MARCH, CLOSE ON LEADINGPLATOON, AT EASE, and REST. These com-mands are given without inflection and at a uni-formly high pitch and loudness comparable to thatfor a normal command of execution.

c. The commander faces his troops when givingcommands except as outlined in paragraph 8c.

d. For a change in direction, the preparatorycommand and the command of execution are givenso as to end as the foot, corresponding to the direc-tion of the turn or movement, strikes the ground.

e. The commander gives AS YOU WERE torevoke a preparatory command that he has given.He may give AS YOU WERE to cancel a com-mand of execution given at the halt, or movementsin the manual of arms that are being improperlyexecuted. In this case, the movement stops andthe men resume their former position. If an im-properly given command is not revoked, the menexecute the movement in the best manner possible.

8. Supplementary Commands

a. When a command requires an element of aunit to execute a movement different from the otherelements, or the same movement at a different time,the subordinate commander gives a supplementarycommand over his shoulder.

b. Generally, supplementary commands are givenbetween the preparatory command and commandof execution of the unit commander. In some cases,the supplementary commands follows the commandof execution.

13

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 15: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. When a subordinate leader gives a supplemen-tary command he turns his head toward the ma-jority of his element and gives the command overhis shoulder. He does not face about.

9. Directives

A directive is always given by a commander.This command causes action to be taken by imme-diate subordinate leaders. There is a thin line ofdistinction between a directive and a combinedcommand. The commander giving a directive (e.g.,OPEN RAN:KS) does not relinquish his command;however, when the commander gives a combinedcommand he may relinquish his command. Forexample, the command TAKE CHARGE OFYOUR COMPANIES would relinquish commandto immediate subordinate leaders.

Section II. THE COMMAND VOICE

10. General

The precision with which a movement is exe-cuted is affected by the manner in which the com-mand is given. A correctly delivered command isloud and distinct and will be understood clearlyby everyone in the unit. Correct commands havea tone, cadence, and snap that demand willing,correct, and immediate response.

11. Voice Control

a. The loudness of a command is adjusted tt thenumber of men in the unit. Normally, the com-mander places himself in the front and center of

14

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 16: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

his unit and speaks facing his unit so that his voicereaches all the men.

b. It is necessary for the voice to have carryingpower, but excessive exertion is unnecessary andharmful. A typical result of "trying too hard" isthe almost unconscious tightening of the neck mus-cles to force sound out. This will produce strain,hoarseness, sore throat, and, worst of all, indistinctand jumbled sounds instead of clear commands.Ease is achieved through good posture, properbreathing, correct adjustment of throat and mouthmuscles, and confidence.

c. The best posture for giving commands is atthe position of attention (fig. 6). Soldiers in for-mation notice the posture of their leader. If hisposture is unmilitary (relaxed, slouched, stiff, oruneasy) the men will imitate it.

d. The most important muscle used in breathingis the diaphragm, the large muscle that separatesthe chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. Thediaphragm automatically controls normal breath-ing and is used to control the breath in givingcommands.

e. The cavities of the throat, mouth, and noseact as amplifiers and help to give fullness (reso-nance) and projection to the voice.

12. Distinctness

a. Distinctness depends on the correct use of yourtongue, lips, and teeth, which form the separatesounds of a word and group the sounds into syl-lables. Distinct commands are effective; indistinctcommands cause confusion. All commands can be

15

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 17: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

pronounced correctly without loss of effect. Placeemphasis on correct enunciation (distinctness). Toenunciate clearly, make full use of your lips, tongue,and lower jaw.

b. To develop the ability to give clear, distinctcommands, practice giving commands slowly andcarefully, prolonging the syllables. Then gradu-ally increase your rate of delivery until you de-velop the proper cadence, still enunciating eachsyllable distinctly.

13. Inflection

Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and thetone changes of the voice.

a. The preparatory command is the commandwhich indicates the movement. Pronounce eachpreparatory command with a generally rising in-flection. The most desirable pitch when beginninga preparatory command is near the level of yournatural speaking voice. A common fault with be-ginners is to start the preparatory command in apitch so high that, after employing a rising inflec-tion for the preparatory command, it is impossibleto give the command of execution with clarity orwithout strain. A good rule to remember is tobegin a command near the natural pitch of yourvoice.

b. The command of execution is the commandwhich indicates when a movement is to be executed.Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higherpitch than the last syllable of the preparatory con-mand. It must have plenty of snap. The best wayto develop a command voice is to practice com-

16

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 18: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mands like PLATOON, HALT. Figures 1 through5 show graphically how commands should soundand how they should be given.

c. In some commands, such as FALL IN andFALL OUT, the preparatory command and com-mand of execution are combined. Give these com-mands without inflection and at a uniformly highpitch and loudness comparable to that for a normalcommand of execution.

14. Cadence

a. Cadence in commands means a uniform andrhythmic flow of words. The interval betweencommands is generally of uniform length for anygiven troop unit. This is necessary so that every-one in the unit will be able to understand thepreparatory command and will know when to ex-pect the command of execution. For the squad orplatoon in march, except when supplementary com-mands need to be given, the best interval of timeis that which allows one step (or count) betweenthe preparatory command and the command ofexecution.

For example:One Two ThreePLATOON HALT

The same interval is best for commands given atthe halt. To develop the proper cadence, count thecadence ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR, in quick time; thengive commands such as RIGHT, FACE, without in-terrupting the cadence:

One Two Three FourRIGHT FACE

17

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 19: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

PITC-

PITCH i XADENCE

CADENCE

Figure 1. Diagram of the command, SQUAD, ATTENTION.

Longer commands, such as RIGHT FLANK, MARCH,must be started so that the preparatory commandwill end on the proper foot, and leave a full countbetween the preparatory command and commandof execution-

Left Right Left RightRIGHT FLANK MARCH

Pronounce each word distinctly.b. For a platoon, company, or larger unit, when

supplementary commands are necessary, the inter-val must be long enough to let the other leadersgive the supplementary command for their par-ticular unit. The following example shows propercadence for giving the command RIGHT, FACE, toa company in line or a column of platoons.One Two Three Four One TwoRIGHT RIGHT FACE

(Company (Platoon (CompanyCommander) Leaders) Commander)

18

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 20: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

PITCH

CADENCE

Figure 2. Diagram of the command, REAR, MARCH.

15. Snap

Snap is the extra quality in a command that de-mands immediate response. It expresses confidence,alertness, decisiveness and complete control of your-self and the situation. Get as much snap into thecommands as possible, but never neglect distinct-ness. Know the commands and be able to voicethem effectively.

16. Mass Commands

a. Mass commands may be used to develop con-fidence and enthusiasm.

b. When the instructor wants his unit to usemass commands, he announces AT YOUR COM-MAND. He gives a preparatory command describ-ing the movement he wants performed; for exam-ple, FACE THE PLATOON TO THE RIGHT. His commandof execution is COMMAND. When he says COM-

19

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 21: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

HIGHEST/

PITCH A

%v. I 2 3 4CADENCE

Figure 3. Diagram of the command, PORT, ARMS.

HIGHESTPITCH

' VOICE __

-CI CADENCE

Figure 4. Diagram of the command, RIGHT FLANK,MARCH.

20

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 22: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

HIGHEST

PITCH

: ¢_¢ I

"' ImCA CADENCE

Figure 5. Diagram of the command, COMPANY,(PLATOON), HALT.

MAND, all men in the unit give the commandRIGHT, FACE in unison and execute it.

c. The following mass commands are the onesnormally used:

(1) CALL THE PLATOON TO ATTENTION, COM-

MAND.(2) HAVE THE PLATOON STAND AT PARADE REST,

COMMAND.(3) FACE THE PLATOON TO THE RIGHT, COM-

MAND.(4) MARCH THE PLATOON FORWARD, COM-

MAND.(5) HALT THE PLATOON, COMMAND.

d. To give mass commands while marching, theinstructor gives the preparatory command for themovement and substitutes COMMAND for thecommand of execution MARCH: for example:

21

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 23: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

COLUMN RIGHTr, COMMAND: REAR, COMMAND.e. When the instructor wants to stop mass com-

mands, he says AT MY COMMAND. The normalmethod of drilling is then resumed.

17. Individual Commands from Ranks

After a unit has acquired some skill in executingcommands and in giving mass commands, the in-structor may designate an individual by name orplace in ranks and have him give commands. Hedesignates the man while marching or at a haltand describes the movement to be performed as hedoes for mass commands, except that he does notadd COMMAND. The designated man then givesthe appropriate command, remaining in his posi-tion in ranks and executing the movement with theplatoon. After the man has given several com-mands, the instructor and the rest of the groupcritique his performance.

22

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 24: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 3

SCHOOLING OF THE SOLDIERWITHOUT ARMS

18. Generala. This chapter contains most of the individual

positions and movements required in drill. Thesepositions and the correct execution of the move-ments in every detail should be learned before pro-ceeding to unit drill. Measurements of distance inthis manual are approximated; however, precisionis required in drill.

b. The explanation of a movement that may beexecuted toward either flank is given in this chap-ter for only one flank. To execute the movementstoward the opposite flank, substitute the word"left" for "right," or "right" for "left" in the ex-planation.

c. Any marching movement may be executed indouble time unless stated otherwise. When a move-ment is to be executed in double time from a haltor from quick time, the command DOUBLETIME immediately precedes the command of eze-cution. (When the unit is in double time, DOU-BLE TIME is not given preceding the commandof execution for the movement.)

23

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 25: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

19. Drill Terms

To help understand the meaning of drill termsused in this chapter, the following explanationsare included:

a. Cadence is the uniform rhythm in which amovement is executed, or the number of steps orcounts per minute at which the movement is exe-cuted.

b. Double time is the cadence of 180 counts orsteps per minute. It is also the. name of the march-ing movement in which 180 36-inch steps per min-ute are taken.

c. Element is an individual, squad, section, pla-toon, company, or larger unit forming a part ofthe next larger unit.

d. Step is the prescribed distance measuredfrom heel to heel of a marching man.

e. Quick time is the cadence of 120 counts orsteps per minute. It is also the name of the march-ing movement in which 120 30-inch steps per min-ute are taken.

20. Position of Attention

a. Assume the position of attention (fig. 6) onthe command FALL IN or SQUAD (PLATOON), AT-TENTION.

b. To come to attention, bring your heels to-gether smartly on the same line.

c. Turn your feet out equally, forming an angleof 450 .

d. Keep your legs straight without stiffening orlocking your knees.

e. Hold your body erect with your hips level,

24

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 26: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I

I'

Figure 6. Position of attention.

25

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 27: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

chest lifted and arched, and your shoulders squareand even.

f. Let your arms hang straight without stiffnessalong your sides with the backs of your hands out-ward, your fingers curled so that the tips of thethumbs are alongside and touching the first jointof your forefingers. Keep your thumbs straight andalong the seams of your trousers with all fingerstouching the legs.

g. Keep your head erect and hold it squarely tothe front with your chin drawn in so that the axisof your head and neck is vertical. Look straightto the front.

h. Rest the weight of your body equally on theheels and balls of your feet.

21. Rests at the Halt

a. The following rests are executed at the halt:parade rest, stand at ease, at ease, rest, and fall out.

b. At the command REST, of PARADE, REST(given at attention only), move your left foot 10inches to the left of your right foot. Keep yourlegs straight so that the weight of your body restsequally on the heels and the balls of your feet. Atthe same time, place your hands behind your backjust below the belt line. Keep the fingers of bothhands extended and joined, interlocking yourthumbs so that the palm of your right hand is out-ward (fig. 7). Hold your head and eyes as at theposition of attention. Remain silent and do notmove.

c. At the command EASE, of STAND AT, EASE(given from the position of attention), execute

26

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 28: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

parade rest as described above, but turn your headand eyes directly toward the commander. Thiscommand is given to gain the individual attentionof the unit when it is in a rest position, withoutsacrificing a uniform appearance.

d. At the command AT EASE, keep your rightfoot in place. You may move, but must remainsilent.

e. At the command REST, keep your right footin place. You may talk and move.

f. AT EASE and REST may be commandedfrom the position of attention, from each other,from parade rest, or stand at ease.

g. In resuming the position of attention from atease, stand at ease, or rest, take the position ofparade rest at the command SQUAD or PLA-TOON; at the command ATTENTION, assumethat position.

h. At the command FALL OUT, given fromattention only, you may leave your position in theformation, but remain in the immediate area. Re-sume your former place in the formation at theposition of attention at the command FALL IN.

i. On the command AT EASE or REST youmust remain standing. Permission is required tosmoke or to drink from your canteen.

22. Facings at the Halt

Facings at the halt are executed in quick time.a. Face to the Flank. The command is RIGHT

(LEFT), FACE. This is a two-count movement.At the command FACE, slightly raise your leftheel and right toe, and turn 900 to the right on

27

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 29: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

your right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on theball of your left foot, in one count. Hold yourleft leg straight without stiffness (1, fig. 8). Onthe second count, place your left foot beside yourright foot, as at attention (2, fig. 8). Hold yourarms as at attention when executing this movement.

b. Face to the Rear. The command is ABOUT,

FACE. This is a two-count movement. At thecommand FACE, move the toe of your right footto a position touching the ground one-half thelength of your foot to the rear and slightly to theleft of your left heel. This is the first count ofthe movement (1, fig. 9). Do not change the posi-tion of your left foot and keep your right legstraight without stiffness, resting most of theweight of your body on the heel of the left foot.On the second count, face to the rear, turning 1800to the right on your left heel and the ball of yourright foot so that your feet are as at attentionwhen you complete the turn (2, fig. 9). Hold yourarms as at attention when executing this movement.

23. Hand Salute and Eyes Right

a. For instructional purposes, the command isHAND, SALUTE. This is a two-count movementand should be taught by the numbers. On the firstcount raise the right hand until the tip of the fore-finger touches the lower part of the headdress orforehead just above and slightly to the right ofthe right eye, fingers and thumb extended andjoined, palm (down, upper arm horizontal with theelbow inclined slightly forward, with the hand andwrist straight (fig. 10). On the second count

28

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 30: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 7. Parade rest (rear view).

29

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 31: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

( ,0 0Figure 8. Right face.

30

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 32: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

o 0Figure 9. About face.

31

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 33: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

II O I

Figure 10. Hand salute.

32

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 34: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

(READY, TWO), drop your hand and arm in themost direct manner to your side as in the positionof attention.

b. EYES, RIGHT is a one-count movement. Onthe command RIGHT, turn your head and eyes tothe right at an angle of 450, keeping your shouldersparallel to the front. On the command FRONTof READY, FRONT, turn your head and eyes to thefront.

24. Steps and Marchings

a. When executed from a halt, all steps andmarching, except right step, begin with the leftfoot.

b. For movements involving a turn while march-ing, both the preparatory command and the com-mand of execution are completed on the foot in thedirection of the turn. For units no larger than asquad or platoon, the commands are given so thatthere is one step between the end of the preparatorycommand and the command of execution. For unitslarger than a platoon, time is allowed for the unitleaders to repeat the preparatory command or givetheir supplementary command.

c. When instructing in marching, it is often help-ful to have the soldiers count in cadence. The in-structor should count cadence as little as possible.The command COUNT CADENCE, COUNT, is given asthe left foot strikes the ground while marching atquick or double time. The soldiers take one morestep and then count aloud for eight steps: ONE,TWO, THREE, FOUR, ONE, TWO, THREE,FOUR. The count should be vigorous. After the

748-141 0 - 64 -3 33

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 35: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

unit is further along in its training, it may behalted when out of step and then marched forwardagain to get proper cadence. The soldiers shoulddevelop a sense of rhythm rather than depend uponcounting cadence.

25. To March with a 30-Inch Step

a. To march with a 30-inch step in the cadenceof quick time from the halt position, the commandis FORWARD, MARCH. At the command FORWARD,

shift the weight of your body to your right legwithout noticeable movement. At the commandMARCH, step off with your left foot and marchforward with 30-inch steps without stiffness or ex-aggerating your movements. Swing your arms9 inches straight to the front and 6 inches to therear of the seams of your trousers. Keep yourarms straight without stiffness, your fingers curledas in the position of attention and just clearingyour trousers when swinging.

b. To halt from quick time, the command isSQUAD (PLATOON), HALT, given as either footstrikes the ground. At the command of exrecution,take one more step and then bring your foot along-side the stationary foot, as at the position of atten-tion, halting in two counts.

26. To March with a 15-Inch Step (Half Step)

a. To march with a 15-inch step, the commandHALF STEP, MARCH is given on either foot, andonly while marching at quick time.

b. At the command MARCH, take one more 30-inch step, then take 15-inch steps in the cadence

34

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 36: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

of quick time. Allow your arms to swing as de-scribed in paragraph 25a.

c. To resume the 30-inch step, the commandFORWARD, MARCH is given as either foot strikesthe ground. At the command of execution, takeone more 15-inch step and then step off with a full30-inch step.

d. The halt from the half step is similar to thehalt from quick time.

e. While marching at the half step, mark timemarch, forward march, and halt are the only com-mands that may be given.

27. To March in Place

a. To march in place at quick time, the commandMARK TIME, MARCH is given as either foot strikesthe ground while marching at quick time or athalf step.

b. When marching at quick time or half step andthe command MSrAK TIrE, MARCH is given, takeone more step after the command of execution,place the trailing foot alongside your stationaryfoot and march in place. Raise each foot alter-nately 2 inches off the ground, executing the move-ment in quick time. Allow your arms to swing asdescribed in paragraph 25a.

c. The command FORWARD, MARCH is given toresume marching with the 30-inch step. Take onemore step in place and then step off with a fullstep. This command is given as either foot strikesthe ground.

d. The halt from mark time is executed similarto the halt from quick time.

35

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 37: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

28. To March with a 10-Inch Stepa. The command RIGHT (LEFT) STEP, MARCH is

given only from the halt.b. On the command MARCH, slightly bend your

right knee and raise your right leg only highenough to allow freedom of movement. Place yourright foot 10 inches to the right of the left foot,and then move the left foot, keeping your left legstraight, to a position alongside the right foot asin the position of attention. Continue this move-ment in the cadence of quick time, keeping yourarms by your sides.

c. To halt from the right (left) step, the pre-paratory command is given when the heels are to-gether, and the command of exeecution (HALT)is given when the heels are together the next time.The halt from the right (left) step is executed intwo counts. On the command HALT, take onemore step with your right foot and place your leftfoot alongside the right, in the position of atten-tion.

29. To March Backward with a 15-Inch Stepa. The command BACKWARD, MARCH is given

from the halt, and for short distances only, as de-scribed in paragraph 25a.

b. At the command MARCH, take a 15-inchstep backward. with your left foot and continuemarching backward with 15-inch steps in the ca-dence of quick time only, allowing your arms toswing naturally.

c. HALT from backward march is executed intwo counts, similarly to the halt from quick time,and may be given as either foot strikes the ground.

36

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 38: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

30. To March in the Opposite Direction

a. The command REAR, MARCH is given as theright foot strikes the ground and only while march-ing in quick time.

b. At the command of execution, take one morestep with your left foot, pivot on the balls of bothfeet, turning 1800 to the right, and step off in thenew direction. The pivot takes a full count. Holdyour arms at your sides while executing the move-ment.

31. To Change Step

a. The command CHANGE STEP, MARCH is givenas the right foot strikes the ground while marchingat quick time.

b. At the command of execution, take one morestep with your left foot, then in one count, placeyour right toe near the heel of your left foot andstep off again with your left foot.

32. To Face in Marching from a Halt

Facings in marching from a halt are importantparts of the following movements: alinements, col-umn left, inspecting men in ranks, close and extendwhile in line, take interval, and assemble. For in-stTUotional purposes only, the command FACE TO

THE RIGHT (LEFT) IN MARCHING, MARCH may beused to teach the individual to execute the move-ment properly. To execute the movement, pivot tothe right or left on the ball of your right foot, andstep off in the indicated direction with your leftfoot. Execute the pivot and then step in one countand continue marching in the new direction.

37

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 39: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

33. To March with a 36-Inch Step (Double Time)

a. The command DOUBLE TIME, MARCH is givenfrom a halt, or as either foot strikes the groundwhile marching at quick time.

b. When double time is given from a halt, shiftthe weight of your body to your right leg withoutnoticeable movement. At the command MARCH,raise your forearms to a horizontal position, withyour fingers and thumbs closed, knuckles out, andstep off with your left foot. Continue to marchwith 36-inch steps in an easy jog at the cadence ofdouble time. Let your arms swing naturally,straight to the front and rear, but keep your fore-arms horizontal.

c. When marching at quick time, and the com-mand DOUBLE TIME, MARCH is given, take onemore 30-inch step and step off with your trailingfoot, in double time as described in b above.

d. To resume quick time from double time, thecommand is QUICK TIME, MARCH, given as eitherfoot strikes the ground. At the comnmand of exe-cution, take two more double time steps, then re-sume quick time, dropping your arms to your sides.

e. To halt from marching at double time: at thecommand of execution, HALT, take two more dou-ble time steps, then drop your arms and halt intwo counts in the cadence of quick time.

34. To March at Double Time in Place

a. To march at double time in place, the com-mand IN PLACE DOUBLE TIME, MARCH is given onlyfrom a halt.

b. On the preparatory command IN PLACE DOUBLE

38

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 40: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

TIMLE, shift the weight of your body to your rightleg without noticeable movement. On the commandMARCH, raise your forearms to a horizontal posi-tion with your fingers and thumbs closed, knucklesout, and (at the same time) starting with your leftfoot, raise your feet alternately approximately 6inches off the ground in the cadence of double time.

c. To halt from in place double time, the com-nund of execution is given as either foot strikesthe ground. Take two more steps in double time,drop your arms, and then halt in two counts.35. Rest Movements While Marching

a. The commands AT EASE, MARCH or ROUTE

STEP, MARCH, are given on either foot whenmarching at quick time.

b. At the command MARCH of AT EASE,

MARCH, take one more step and assume AT EASE,

MARCH. Cadence is not required, but silence ismaintained, as is the prescribed interval and dis-tance.

c. At the command MARCH of ROUTE STEP,

MARCH, take one more step and assume ROUTE

STEP, MARCH. Neither silence nor cadence is re-quired, but the prescribed interval and distance aremaintained.

d. The commands AT EASE and ROUTE STEP,

MARCH are given from quick time or from eachother. The direction of march may be changed bythe commander. He gives directives in an infor-mal manner. The unit must be called to attentionbefore precision movements may be executed. Thecommander counts cadence for eight steps aftercalling the unit to attention.

39

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 41: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 4

SCHOOLING OF THE SOLDIERWITH ARMS

Section I. MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THEM14 RIFLE

36. General

a. Execute FALL IN with the rifle at orderarms.

b. Facings, alinements, and short distance march-ing movements are executed from order arms. Sidestep, backward march, open and close ranks, andclose and extend are short-distance movements.Forward march may be given from order arms tomarch units forward for a short distance. Whenthese movements are commanded while at orderarms, it is necessary to come automatically to trailarms on the command of execution for the move-ment. The rifle is returned to order arms uponhalting.

c. Before a command for any marching move-ment (other than the exceptions stated in b above)is given to armed troops, they are faced in thedirection of march and their weapons brought toright shoulder, port, or sling arms by the appro-priate command. After a marching movement has

40

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 42: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

been completed and it is desired to execute a facingmovement, the command to order or unsling armsis given, followed by the command for the facingmovement.

d. When at a position other than sling arms, thetroops must come to port arms for double time.When the troops are in formation, the commandergives the appropriate commands.

37. Rules for the Rifle Manual of Arms

a. The term "at the balance" refers to a pointon the rifle (fig. 11) just forward of the magazinewell. In this position the little finger of the lefthand is placed on the lower band. While this isnot the true balance of the rifle, it is used as a ref-erence point for instructional purposes and to fa-cilitate the manipulation of the weapon while per-forming the manual of arms.

b. The position of the rifle known as "diagon-ally across the body" (fig. 12) is as follows:

(1) The left hand is at the balance, with thethumb and fingers grasping the rifle andsling. To do this, extend and join thefingers so as to form a U with the thumb.

(2) The barrel is up and at such an angle thatit bisects the juncture of the neck andshoulder. The heel of the butt is on linewith the right hip (fig. 12).

(3) The rifle is held at a height which allowsthe right forearm to be horizontal whenthe small of the stock is grasped with theright hand.

(4) The distance of the rifle from the body

41

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 43: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

-4-4; s H 6.:' *si ~

s? ~i~

Be .i f..X-:: :3t

Iiii~I,

k99 ++Q@4W ,:X,,?

0~~~~.

~,*~i~;~ i

i ,'~'"V ' .

2<37@43t ?\ At ,, ii'0=,;i~

*~~~~~~~~ z

a;;<, ' ,, 0 X ,3

42

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 44: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

m"M

^, I ¥'d · W o ' ·

Figure 12. Rifle held diagonally across the body.

43

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 45: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

depends upon the conformation of thebody, but it should be about 4 inches fromthe belt.

c. The cadence for rifle movements is quick time,but in early stages of instruction the movementsare done more slowly until the troops can executethem with precision. They are then practiced untilthe proper cadence is acquired.

d. The manual for the rifle is executed whilestanding at the position of attention. rTo add in-terest to drill and to lessen fatigue on long marches,movements between right and left shoulder andport arms may be commanded when marching atattention in quick time.

(1) To move the rifle from the right shoulderto the left shoulder, LEFT SHOULDER, ARMSis commanded as the left foot strikes theground. The first count of this movementis executed as the right foot strikes thegrou'nd and the left arm is swinging for-ward in its natural arc.

(2) To move the rifle from the left shoulderto the right shoulder, RIGHT SHOULDER,

ARMS is commanded as the right footstrikes the ground. The first count of thismovement is executed as the left footstrikes the ground and the right arm isswinging forward in its natural arc.

e. The following positions are commanded fromorder arms only: inspection arms, trail arms, fixand unfix bayonets, and the rest position at orderarms. Port awms is the only command that maybe given from inspection arms.

44

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 46: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

f. The manual of arms with the magazine in therifle is restricted to inspection arms, trail arms, andfix and unfix bayonets.

38. Order Arms

a. Order arms is the position of the soldier atattention with the rifle. It is assumed on the com-mand SQUAD (PLATOON), ATTENTION from anyof the rest positions except fall out. Order armsis assumed on the command FALL IN and on thecommand ORDER, ARMS from any position in themanual except inspection arms and sling arms.

b. At order arms, the position of attention ismaintained except for the right arm and rifle.The rifle butt is placed on the ground with thebarrel to the rear and the side of the butt againstthe right shoe. The toe of the butt and the toe ofthe right shoe are on line. The upper part of thehandguard is grasped with the right hand in a Uformed by the fingers and the thumb. The fingersare placed diagonally so the tips of the index fingerand the thumb are grasping the sides of the stock;the right arm is kept behind the rifle so the thumbis along the trousers seam (fig. 13).

39. Rest Positions with the Rifle

Rest positions with the rifle are commanded andexecuted as without arms (para. 21) with the fol-lowing exceptions and additions.

a. On the command PARADE, REST, the left footis placed 10 inches from and on line with the rightfoot. The rifle butt is kept against the right foot,the toe of the butt on line with the toe of the shoe.

45

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 47: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

''4<>~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~~4

X 4 0 4 4 4 4

@44? i\4Ee4

'4 4W*>t2 ¢tt

A4 ~~~ g¾'¾: _ :X:

46

<<¾~~~

-4' -44-- ~ *>~¾<~*4'«< 4'> ~ 4 444

P~gure 18 Order arms

46 : ~ ~ i~·

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 48: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

The barrel of the rifle rests against the hip alongthe seam of the trousers as in the position of atten-tion (1, fig. 14). The grasp of the rifle is un-changed. The left hand is placed behind the backjust below the beltline with the fingers and thumbextended and joined and the palm facing the rear(2, fig. 14).

b. To execute STAND, AT EASE, the parade restposition is assumed and the head and eyes areturned toward the commander.

c. On the command AT EASE, or REST, theright foot remains in place and the rifle is held asin parade rest with the right arm relaxed slightly.

d. When at sling arms, rest positions are com-manded and executed as described in paragraph 48e.

e. Armed troops must be at attention at orderarms, port arms, stack arms, or unsling arms be-fore FALL OUT may be given.

40. Trail Arms

a. For instructional purposes, the commandTRAIL, ARMS may be used to teach the position ata halt. At the command ARMS, the rifle is raisedvertically three inches off the ground with thewrist straight and the thumb along the seam ofthe trousers; the grasp of the rifle does not- change(fig. 15). This movement is executed in one count.

b. At the command ORDER, ARMS the rifle islowered vertically to the position of order arms.For instructional purposes when TRAIL, ARMS iscommanded, the rifle is held at the trail untilORDER, ARMS is given.

47

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 49: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 14. Parade lest.

48

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 50: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

F'igure 14--Continued.

748-141 0 - 64 - 4 49

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 51: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

R s 'Sw yge.so Zj, "71 >+

Pigure 15. Trail arms.

50

9 i i~~~u/ @ ' f

: ( {zE/R, r j j% >XeX f40~~~~~~~ ·

:r, · ':f: · · T g S ·

p'sS _f_ \S; " .

^e ~ 't .7eyp )

I ., A : n 00 0 4M

i: · xz* A·> FtSo

-;· ;X·5 t f. a 60 :; w

Figllre 15. T,'rcil a~fRel

50

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 52: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

41. Port Arms

a. The command is PORT, ARMS.b. This is a two-count movement from order

arms. At the command ARMS, the rifle is raiseddiagonally across the body with the right hand;the left hand grasps the rifle at the balance andholds it so that it is 4 inches from the belt. Theright elbow is held down without strain (1, fig. 16).On the second count, the rifle is regrasped with theright hand at the small of the stock, fingers andthumb closed around the stock (2, fig. 16). Theright forearm is horizontal and the elbows areagainst the sides.

c. From port arms to order arms is a three-countmovement. At the command ARMS, the righthand is moved to regrasp the upper part of thehandguard without moving the rifle (1, fig. 16).On the second count, the left hand is removed fromthe balance, and the rifle is lowered to the rightside with the right hand until the butt is threeinches from the ground. The left hand is placedimmediately below the bayonet stud, fingers andthumb extended and joined, palm to the rear, tosteady the rifle and hold the barrel vertical (fig.17). On the third count, the left hand is cutsharply to the side while the rifle is lowered gentlyto the ground.

42. Right Shoulder Arms

a. The command is RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.b. When executed from order arms, right shoul-

der arms is a four-count movement. At the com-mand ARMS, the first count of port arms is exe-

51

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 53: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

sPiure 16. Port arms.

52

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 54: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

WfrttB~r_· IlE :4 i

i* i i<

4444X, _4 t 4' rs'

Figure 16-Continued.

44" 44

'4 '*4'~~~~~~~,

*4*" 4 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~44 44 44~~~~~~~~~-·-

4p 44~~ 44 44

'47~ 4 44

444 444 - ' Y :44~4''4 4

"~~bl-i~Figure~:- 16-onined

53ae

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 55: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

cuted as described in paragraph 41 (1, fig. 18).The right elbow is held down without strain. Onthe second count, the rifle is regrasped at the buttwith the right hand, the heel of the butt betweenthe first two fingers, and the thumb and fingersclosed around the heel with the thumb and fore-finger touching (2, fig. 18). On the third count,the rifle is placed on the right shoulder with thegrasp of the right hand unchanged. At the sametime, the left hand is moved from the balance tothe small of the stock where it is used to guide therifle to the shoulder (3, fig. 18). The thumb andfingers are extended and joined with palm turnedtoward the body. The first joint of the left fore-finger touches the rear of the receiver. The leftelbow is kept down. On the fourth count, the lefthand is drawn back to its position by the side, asat attention. The right forearm is horizontal withthe right elbow against the side and on line withthe back (4, fig. 18).

c. The return to order arms is a four-countmovement. On the command ARMS, the rifle buttis pressed down quickly and the rifle is guideddiagonally across the body. At the same time, thebutt is turned to keep the barrel up. The rifle isgrasped at the balance with the left hand and thegrasp of the right hand is retained on the butt(count one). On the second count, the right handis moved up and across the body to grasp the upperpart of the handguard. The third and fourthcounts are the same as the second and third counts,used in executing order arms from port arms(para. 41).

54

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 56: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. Right shoulder arms from port arms is athree-count movement. On the first count, the rifleis grasped at the butt with the right hand as incoming to right shoulder from order arms. Thelast two counts are the same as the last two countsin moving from order to right shoulder arms.

e. Port arms from right shoulder arms is a two-count movement. The first count is the same asthe first count from right shoulder to order arms.On the second count, the rifle is regrasped withthe right hand at the small of the stock in the posi-tion of port arms.

43. Left Shoulder Arms

a. The command is LEFT SHOULDER, ARMS.b. To move the rifle to left shoulder arms from

the order, the rifle is brought to port arms in thefirst two counts (fig. 16). On the third count, therifle is placed on the left shoulder with the righthand and the right arm is pressed against thebody. The butt is grasped with the left hand asshown in 1, figure 19. On the fourth count, theright hand is drawn to the side in returning to theposition of attention (2, fig. 19).

c. Port arms from left shoulder arms is a two-count movement. On the first count, the righthand moves up and across the body and grasps thesmall of the stock and the right arm is pressedagainst the body (1, fig. 19). On the secondcount, the rifle is brought diagonally across thebody with the right hand and regrasped at thebalance with the left hand as in the position ofport arms (2, fig. 16).

55

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 57: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

§ H i _ 000:0.t,74 ;0 'by - :;Xg

-A n X

iK

Figure 17. Nest to last count of order arms.

56

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 58: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

fiue 18. Right shoulder ar ms.

57

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 59: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

.r · ?*·.-~ - ; : a " p: i

r · ~~~

-*- ~~~~~~~a

. 2 , = . , ,

2, .L_ X ,8 . ..... . ^ v....

Figure 18-Continued.

58

.i 25 - @ .':Es2. ._ ,

,§t gaa.. '&4s>'-7

' * >~ ·P- ·* t_ la 9 a

>~~~~~~~f 6 -6-9Xga· < s4922a '.

Fi iS 1-otiud

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 60: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

.+}3 : §'t.-6 a e e \ 5g·i * t ^aS

~~~~S'S ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ A

a 5 5 ^'^^ *_jES ' 55^ S ^^?

I t t l' MX ,

· · a >, a

5 + +: > g ^ .< X * s a A < U u < s s .: v -

'W ''i

igure 18-ContinUed,

59

~~~" I

a~~·~ · ·~ .· c ff t2wX <&e>> 6 r & k & a3

.egg~" ~ 9~ .@ $EAg-_rg>o ^s8 iS C ~

Figure 18--Continued.

59

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 61: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

! * 4. .4.·

44 X4 4 4i:44 4

Fig4re 184-ontinued.

60

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 62: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. Order arms or right shoulder arms from leftshoulder arms is a five-count movement. On thefirst two counts the rifle is brought to port arms.On the last three counts it is possible to go to orderarms or right shoulder arms as described in para-graphs 38 and 42.

44. Present Arms

a. The command is PRESENT, ARMS.b. Order arms to present arms is a two-count

movement. On the first count, the rifle is raisedand carried to the center of the body. It is heldvertical, four inches from the body with the barrelto the rear. The right elbow is down. The rifleand sling are grasped at the balance with the lefthand. The left forearm is horizontal and the leftelbow is against the side (1, fig. 20). On the sec-ond count, the right hand regrasps the rifle at thesmall of the stock (2, fig. 20).

c. Order arms from present arms is a three-count movement. On the first count, the rifle isgrasped at the upper part of the handguard withthe right hand (1, fig. 20) with the right elbowkept down and against the side. The rifle is low-ered to the ground with the right hand on countstwo and three as in port arms to order arms(fig. 17).

d. Port arms from present arms is executed inone count. The rifle is raised and twisted with theright hand, the muzzle moves to the left, and therifle is regrasped at the balance with the left hand(2, fig. 16).

e. Present arms from port arms is executed in

61

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 63: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

k~~~~~~~~~E$ ·-$ at a cH~ a~;4j8 e *.

44 9 9 P .8N 2

S~~~~~

;. 4:) ftSe,> 41 '°55B '5 .44>*0

5. .: .

54 555' 55l

§ ~Z§ 49' _s2L5p zA9X. 55 ffi' .5 5554 .5, 5 5

)9 ~ ~ ~ ~ fo §rd. arms. i

62 M , 4g / $

@;<X )t I§ i_ W Xr b

$0 t 3g Xa~~~~~~~~~~ A L .S X&

^~ Fi·r 19 oltTreo tf hv ramf 1 om odel arms

62

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 64: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

:B ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ 4 *I

4444 , 442 44i.·

I i

:44 4 :

r :' : _

;:0i: · · ·;:~a- l S1~II ii i:l·

_ _i

- ; ¢&,9e - _~~~~~~~~~~-

g ' · Figure 19 Continued.

63

S v ks t ~b ·O <.

* a s >~ +gg~ ' eM 9Rj~ Ni~ g7 6?z 0 " 4 i {:8Z

g R g @ . ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ & &~~aI

is~~~~lzle:=ug'(^#5 5i i ')§dj .w29_i. 2u >... i

R i pC + 'nsi.; /9 L; w 9e z ' _ i t> t 9

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 65: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 20. Present arms.

64

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 66: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 20--Continued.

748-141 0 -64 - 5 65

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 67: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

one count. The rifle is lowered and twisted withthe right hand while being moved into a verticalposition where it is regrasped at the balance withthe left hand.

45. Inspection Arms (without the Magazine)

a. The command is INsPECTION, ARMS. It is afour-count movement, executed only from orderarms.

b. At the command ARMS, the rifle is raiseddiagonally across the body with the right handand is grasped with the left hand at the balanceas in the first count of port arms (para. 41b). Onthe second count, the right hand grasp is releasedand the right hand slides down the rifle with thefingers extended and joined, until the knife edgeof the hand comes in contact with the operatingrod handle. Now the thumb is on the oppositeside of the receiver (1, fig. 21). On the thirdcount, the operating rod handle is pressed sharplyto the rear and the bolt lock is depressed with thethumb so that the bolt is locked in the rearmostposition. At the same time, the head and eyes arelowered to check the receiver (2, fig. 21). On thefourth count, having found the receiver empty orhaving emptied it, the head and eyes are raisedto the front and the rifle is regrasped at the smallof the stock as in port arms.

c. Poair, ARMS is the only command that is givenfrom inspection arms. On the preparatory com-mand, the grip on the small of the stock is relaxedto permit the index finger to hook around the oper-ating rod handle, pulling it slightly to the rear so

66

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 68: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

that the bolt lock will be released (1, fig. 22). Atthe command ARMS, the operating rod handle isreleased, the trigger pulled, and the small of thestock regrasped in the position of port arms.

46. Inspections Arms (with the Magazine)

a. The command is INSPECTION, ARMS. It is afour-count movement with the first two counts thesame as inspection arms without the magazine.On the third count, the operating rod handle ispressed sharply to the rear with the knife edge ofthe right hand until the bolt engages the magazinefollower. At the same time, the head and eyesare lowered to check the receiver. On the fourthcount, having found the receiver empty or havingemptied it, the head and eyes are raised and therifle is regrasped at the small of the stock as inport arms.

b. PORT, ARMS is the only command given frominspection arms. On the preparatory command,the right hand releases the rifle and, with fingersextended and joined, the knife edge of the hand ispressed against the operating rod handle. Afterthe operating rod handle is pressed slightly to therear, the thumb is inserted in the rearmost part ofthe receiver to depress the magazine follower. Thebolt is allowed to slide forward slightly (2, fig. 22).On the command ARMS, the operating rod handleis released. The right hand is returned to thesmall of the stock, the trigger is pulled, and theposition of port arms is assumed.

67

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 69: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 21. Inspection arms without magazine.

68

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 70: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

-p~~~~~~s :~~anA

A;~~~~

· $:~ ~ ~ _12 B ·g §.'.M

A:4 '4 : - 1' 49 ' 4

Figure 21-Continued,

69

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 71: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

; < t+Xs R 'I ^4

Vi ?. :

Figure 22. 1'ort arnms fromn inspection arms.

70

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 72: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 22 (ontinued.

71

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 73: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

47. Rifle Salute

a. This movement may be executed from orderarms, trail arms, right shoulder arms, or left shoul-der arms. For instructional purposes, the commandRIFLE, SALUTE may be used. The rifle salute isa two-count movement and should be taught bythe numbers.

b. When at order arms, the left arm movesacross the body on the first count, with the fore-arm and wrist straight, fingers and thumb ex-tended and joined, and palm down. The first jointof the forefinger touches the rifle at a point belowthe bayonet stud (1, fig. 23). If not in ranks, thehead and eyes turn toward the person or colorsaluted. On the second count, the left hand ismoved to the side and the head and eyes are turnedto the front.

c. When saluting at trail arms, the movementsare identical with those for saluting at orderarms, except that the rifle is held in the trail armsposition.

d. At right shoulder arms, the movement is exe-cuted by moving the left arm across the chest andtouching the first joint of the forefinger to therear of the receiver. The left elbow is held so thatthe left forearm is horizontal. Fingers, thumb,and wrist are held as described in b above. Thepalm is down (2, fig. 23). The second count of therifle salute at right shoulder arms is similar to thereturn from the rifle salute at order arms.

e. At left shoulder arms, the salute is executedby moving the right arm across the chest and touch-ing the first joint of the forefinger to the rear of

72

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 74: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the receiver. The right elbow is held so that theforearm is horizontal. The fingers, thumb, andwrist are as described in b above. The palm isdown. The second count is similar to the returnfrom the rifle salute at right shoulder arms.

48. Sling and Unsling Arms

a. The command SLING, ARMS is given onlyfrom order arms and unsling arms. This move-ment is not executed in cadence. If the sling isnot adjusted, the butt of the rifle is placed on theright hip and the rifle is cradled in the crook ofthe right arm at the command of execution. Thesling is adjusted with both hands and the rifle isthen slung over the right shoulder in the most con-venient manner. When at sling arms, the sling isgrasped with the right hand, keeping the rightforearm horizontal and holding the barrel of therifle vertical (fig. 24). If the sling is already ad-justed, the rifle is slung in the most convenientmanner at the command of execution.

b. The command UNSLING, ARMS is given onlyfrom the position of sling arms. At the commandof execution, the rifle is unslung and brought to theposition of unsling arms by steadying the rifle withthe left hand. The positions of order arms andunsling arms are the same except that at unslingarms the sling is loose.

c. So that precise movements of the manual canbe executed, the command ADJUST, SLINGS isgiven. At the command SLINGS, the sling istightened as described in a above.

d. To salute while at sling arms, on the com-

73

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 75: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mand ARMS of PRESENT, ARMS, the sling isgrasped with left hand to steady the rifle. Thepalm of the left hand is to the rear and the fore-arm is horizontal. At the same time, the sling isreleased with the right hand and the first countof the hand salute is executed as described in para-graph 23. At; the command ARMS of ORDER,

ARMS, the right hand and arm are moved to theside as in the position of attention and then theoriginal position of sling arms is resumed.

e. When at sling arms, parade rest, rest, at ease,and stand at ease are executed as from order armsexcept that the rifle is held slung with the righthand. When the command REST is given, therifle may be unslung. When calling a squad orplatoon to attention, the position of parade restat sling arms is assumed on the preparatory com-mand.

49. Fix and Unfix Bayonets

a. These movements are not executed in cadence.b. On the command Fix, BAYONETS (when

the bayonet scabbard is on the belt), the muzzleof the rifle is moved across the body and regraspedwith the left hand below the gas cylinder plug.The snap on the scabbard is unfastened and thebayonet is grasped with the right hand, as shownin figure 25. The bayonet is drawn from the scab-bard. The point of the bayonet is turned skywardand the bayonet is fixed on the muzzle with adownward movement. After the bayonet is fixed,the position of attention is assumed.

74

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 76: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

?:9~~~~~~~~~? i

QI~~~~~~~

|~~~~~~~~~ E ?i~i; ClefC· '~'

~; ~io:,.,v e '!.id:ii~~~ **

c·~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~*

Fiure 3. Rifle salute.

75

:": iSSSiFigure 2S. Rijte salute.:

~~~~ - r~~~~~~~7

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 77: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 23-Continued.

76

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 78: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Pigure 24. Sling arin's.

77

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 79: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

~ ~> ~~~~~~~~~~~~~·,~:ri

'F. Fix rl,- 4- bw.yoets.

78S 4ta > w e ;v As 6 ,, X, - ,,,

Figur~e 25. Fix and unfix bayonets.

78

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 80: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. The command UNFIX, BAYONETS is givenat order arms only.

d. At the command BAYONETS, when thebayonet scabbard is on the belt, the rifle is movedto the left hand as when fixing bayonets. Therifleman glances down and grasps the handle ofthe bayonet with the right hand, the palm towardthe body. The bayonet catch spring is pressedwith the inside of the forefinger. The bayonet israised vertically until the handle is approximatelya foot above the muzzle of the rifle. Then, keep-ing the eyes on the point of the bayonet, the rifle-man returns the bayonet to the scabbard, reversingthe movements of its withdrawal. The snap onthe bayonet scabbard is fastened with the lefthand and the position of order arms is assumed.

e. When the bayonet is carried other than onthe belt, it is fixed and unfixed in the most con-venient manner possible upon receiving the com-mands.

f. Safety precautions should be observed whenfixing bayonets while the rifle is held diagonallyacross the body with the left hand. Tap the baseof the bayonet handle with the heel of the righthand to make sure that the bayonet is secure. Ifresistance is met when unfixing the bayonet, thrustthe bayonet into the ground, blade facing the righttoe. Then press the bayonet release with the toeof the right boot and remove the rifle from thebayonet. The blade of the bayonet is not touchedwith bare hands.

79

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 81: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Section II. MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE.45 CALIBER PISTOL

50. General

a. Pistol movements are not executed in cadence.b. When armed with the pistol, remain at atten-

tion during the manual of arms for the rifle.c. Execute all movements and positions, except

inspection arms, as without arms.

51. Inspection Arms

When armed with the pistol, for instructionalpurposes only, execute the following movementsseparately on the indicated commands, or in se-quence when INSPECTION, ARMS is given (4, fig.26).

a. Raise Pistol. At the command RAISE, PIS-TOL, unbutton the flap of the holster with yourright hand and grasp the pistol grip with the backof your hand outward. Draw the pistol from theholster. Bring your elbow to your side and holdyour upper arm vertical and forearm at an anglefrom the vertical so that your hand is as high as,-and approximately 6 inches in front of, your rightshoulder. Hold the pistol grip with your thumband last three fingers and extend your forefingeroutside and along the trigger guard. Point themuzzle outward and up at approximately 30 ° an-gle from the vertical (1, fig. 26). If you are wear-ing a shoulder holster, at the command RAISE,PISTOL, unbutton the flap or snap fastener, drawthe pistol from the shoulder holster, and assumethe position of raise pistol.

80so

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 82: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. Withdraw Magazine. At the command WITH-

DRAW, MAGAZINE, without lowering your righthand, turn the barrel slightly to the right, pressthe magazine catch with your left hand (2, fig.26). Place the magazine between your belt andouter garment, on your left side, with the openend down, front to the right.

c. Open Chamber. At the command, OPEN,

CHAMBER, without lowering your right hand,grasp the slide with your left thumb and first twofingers so that your thumb is on the left side ofthe slide and pointing downward. Keeping themuzzle elevated, shift the grip of your right handso that your right thumb engages the slide stop;push the slide fully to the rear, and engage thestop in its notch with your right thumb (3, fig.26). Resume the position of raise pistol, with theslide to the rear. Take the magazine out of yourbelt and hold it in your open hand at the heightof your belt with the open end of the magazine tothe front and the front of the magazine to theleft. If the inspecting officer takes your pistol forinspection, lower your right arm and hand to yourside as in the position of attention. Raise yourright arm and hand to the raise pistol positionwhen the inspector is ready to return the pistol.

d. Close Chamber. After your pistol has beeninspected, or at the preparatory command ofCLOSE, CHAMBER or PORT, ARMS, press the slidestop down with your right thumb and let the slidego forward, Pull the trigger and remain at raisepistol.

e. Insert Magazine. At the preparatory corn-

748-141 0 -64 - 6 81

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 83: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figure 26. Inspection arms with pistol.

82

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 84: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figure 26-Continued.

83

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 85: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mand of INSERT, MAGAZINE, without loweringyour right hand, turn the barrel slightly to theright. Grasp the magazine with the first twofingers and thumb of your left hand and insert itin the pistol (2, fig. 26). At the command of exe-cution, press the magazine fully home and resumeraise pistol (1, fig. 26).

52. Return Pistol

a. Execute this movement on the command, RE-TURN, PISTOL or onr the command ORDER (RIGHT

SHOULDER), A:RMS after INSPECTION, ARMS andPORT, ARMS have been given.

b. On the command of execution, lower yourpistol to the holster, muzzle down, with the backof your hand to the right. Then raise the flap ofthe holster with your right thumb, insert the muz-zle of the pistol into the holster, and thrust ithome. Button the flap of the holster with yourright hand. When wearing a shoulder holster, atthe command RETURN, PISTOL, return the pistoldirectly from the position of raise pistol to theholster and button the flap or snap fastener.

Section III. MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THEGRENADE LAUNCHER, M79

53. General

a. Carry the: grenade launcher slung over yourright shoulder in a position similar to sling armsfor the rifle (fig- 27). When armed with the gre-nade launcher, remain at attention during the man-ual of arms.

'4

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 86: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. During marches and field exercises, when leftshoulder arms is commanded to ease fatigue, changethe grenade launcher to your left shoulder with-out cadence.

c. When AT, EASE or REST is commanded,keep the grenade launcher slung unless otherwiseordered.

d. Execute PARADE, REST or STAND AT, EASEwith the grenade launcher at sling arms as de-scribed for the rifle at sling arms.

e. When armed with the grenade launcher, ren-der the hand salute as prescribed in paragraph 48d.

54. Inspection Arms

a. INSPECTION, ARMS is executed from slingarms. At the command of execoution, grasp thesling with the left hand at the right shoulder(1, fig. 28), and lift the grenade launcher fromyour shoulder. At the same time, withdraw theright arm from between the sling and the grenadelauncher. Grasp the small of the stock with yourright hand and bring the grenade launcher acrossthe body in a manner similar to port arms withthe rifle. Release the sling with the left hand andgrasp the fore-end assembly between the barrelband and the fulcrum pin (2, fig. 28). With thethumb of the right hand, press the latch lever tothe right (outward) until it disengages from thebarrel locking lug. Using both hands in a break-ing motion, force the receiver in a upward motionto disengage the barrel group from its seat in thereceiver group. At the same time, lower the headand eyes to glance at the chamber (3, fig. 28).

85

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 87: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Having found the chamber empty or having emp-tied it, raise the head and eyes to the front andregrasp the small of the stock in the position ofport arms (4, fig. 28).

b. Inspection arms with the grenade launcher isnot a precision movement and is not executed aspart of the manual of arms, except when your unitis formed and dismissed, or for an inspectingofficer.

c. As inspection arms, the only command is PORT,

ARMS. At the command ARMS, by using bothhands in a breaking motion, force the receivergroup and chamber downward until the latch leverengages with the barrel locking lug. With thethumb of the right hand, push the safety buttonforward, pull the trigger with your forefinger, andresume port arms.

d. The grenade launcher nomenclature is shownin figure 29.

55. To Resume Sling Armsa. Execute SLING, ARMS on the commands,

ORDER, (RIGHT SHOULDER) ARMS after INSPECTION,

ARMS, and PORT, ARMS have been given.b. At the command of execution, grasp the sling

with your left hand, thrust the right arm throughthe sling, and assume the position of sling arms.This movement is not executed in cadence.

Section IV. MANUAL OF THE GUIDON

56. Generala. The guidon is a company (troop or battery)

identification flag. It is carried at ceremonies andwhen otherwise prescribed by the commander.

86

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 88: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 27. The grenade launcher at sling arms.

87

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 89: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I

0 oFigure 28. Inzspection arms.

88

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 90: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

K

0 -0Figure 28--Cntinued.

89

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 91: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

<

m/L~~~~~U)~,I- m

.. I

mw w~~~~~~~~

to

2o

o- U)U)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U

90

I \ I· I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l I ~~~~~l

Ek

m n w

z

a. '

u~~~~

<~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~w (5

rr~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r

(D Ld w

C

- 7

z >

< <90

uf

w Ln

a: ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~a

90~~~~~~~~~

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 92: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. The guidon bearer is specially selected by thecompany commander and receives special instruc-tion in his duties. When armed with a rifle orcarbine, the bearer slings the weapon behind hisback, with the sling diagonally across his chestand the muzzle up and to the left, unless other-wise ordered.

c. To face with the guidon, raise the ferrulethree inches off the ground by bending your rightarm slightly. Execute this movement in a mannersimilar to facing with a rifle at order arms, butkeep the staff in a vertical position throughout themovement.

d. Execute PRESENT, ARMS; PARADE, REST;AT EASE; STAND AT, EASE; and REST withthe unit.

e. When marching at route step or at ease, youmay hold the guidon in either hand at the carryposition.

f. To execute PARADE, REST, on the preparatorycommand let your right hand slide up the staffuntil the forearm is horizontal with the ground.On the command of execution incline the staff for-ward until your arm is fully extended (1 and 2,fig. 30). At the same time place your left footand hand in position as in parade rest with therifle (fig. 14).

g. Execute AT EASE similar to parade rest,except that you may slightly relax your right arm.

h. When given REST, hold the guidon in eitherhand.

i. When not in formation, render the salute simi-

91

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 93: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I

Figure 30. Parade rest with the guidon.

lar to the rifle salute as described in paragraph 47(1 and 2, fig. 31).

57. Order Guidon

When the troops are armed, execute order guidonon the command ORDER, ARMS from the company

92

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 94: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0

1 Order guidon2 Carry guidon

Figure 31. Salute.93

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 95: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

commander. With unarmed troops, execute orderguidon automatically on halting. At order guidon,keep the ferrule on the ground and touching theoutside of your right shoe, opposite the ball of yourright foot. E[old the staff in your right hand inthe U formed by your fingers extended and joined,and your thumb. Keep your right hand and armbehind the staff with your arm bent naturally.Rest the staff against the hollow of your shoulder(fig. 32). The remainder of the position of orderguidon is the same as the position of attention.

58. Raise Guidon

On the preparatory portion of all commandsthat begin, change, and discontinue marchingmovements, and on the preparatory commands forcomiPANY or GRouP, ATTENTION; PRESENT,

ARMS; and EYES, RIGHT, raise the guidon tothe raise guidon position by grasping the staff withyour left hand, palm to the rear, at a point oppo-site your right elbow. Raise the staff with yourleft hand to a position 6 inches off the ground.Keep your right hand in its original position andallow the staff to slide through it. Regrasp thestaff in its new position with your right hand and,at the same time, raise the staff with both handsuntil your right hand is as high as, and in frontof, your right shoulder. Retain your grasp withboth hands and keep your right elbow into yourside. Keep the staff vertical (fig. 33). Hold theguidon in this position until the command of exe-cution is given.

94

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 96: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

59. Carry Guidon

a. To return to carry guidon from raise guidon,lower the staff, keeping it vertical, until your rightarm is fully extended. Return your left hand toyour left side. The ferrule is now 6 inches off theground and the staff is resting in the hollow ofyour right shoulder. The right hand grasps thestaff in the most convenient manner, as depictedin 2, figure 31. Return to carry guidon at allcommands of execution while in the march.

b. To return to order guidon, follow the proce-dure as in a above on the command of execution,but let the staff slide through your right hand un-til the ferrule touches the ground.

c. At double time, hold the guidon diagonallyacross your body. Grasp the staff with your righthand at the position used at the carry, with yourright forearm horizontal and your elbow near yourbody. Grasp the staff in your left hand oppositethe junction of your neck and left shoulder.

60. Present Guidon

a. At ARMS of PRESENT, ARMS or RIGHT ofEYES, RIGHT, lower the guidon to the front fromthe raise guidon position by lowering your leftarm to a diagonal position in front of your body.Rest the staff in your armpit and hold it horizon-tal. Keep your right forearm along the right sideof the staff, upper arm vertical and into your body.The point of the ferrule slightly protrudes behindyour back. At the same time, move your left handaway to your side (fig. 34).

b. When passing in review, EXECUTE EYES,

95

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 97: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 82. Order guidoz n

96

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 98: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 33. Raise guidon.

97748-141 0 - 64 - 7

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 99: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

K;tt

0)

VV

V

98

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 100: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

RIGHT as you present the guidon, and READY,

FRONT, as you bring the guidon back to carry.On the command READY Of READY, FRONT, regraspthe staff with your left hand and execute raiseguidon; on FRONT, return to carry guidon..

99

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 101: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 5

THE SQUAD

Section I. GENERAL

61. General

a. Training in individual movements and themanual of arms is followed by dismounted drill.This training is progressive and includes threephases: squad, platoon, and company drill. In thefirst phase you begin to play your part on a team,the squad. In squad drill, you learn to do all theindividual movements together with other men.

b. When the squad leader is absent, the secondin command takes over his duties and assumes hisnormal position.

c. Individual members of a squad are numberedfrom right to left when in line, and from front torear when in column.

62. Drill Terms

To help understand the meaning of drill termsin this chapter, the following definitions are in-cluded:

a. Formation is the arrangement of the elementsof a command in any prescribed manner.

100

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 102: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. Line is a formation in which the elements ofa command (other than a platoon) are side by side,or abreast of each other. Two or more elementsconstitute a line.

c. Rank is a line which is only one element indepth.

d. Interval (fig. 35) is the lateral space betweenelements. Normal interval between men is meas-ured from right to left by the man on the rightholding his left arm and hand shoulder high, fin-gers and thumb extended and joined, with the tipof his middle finger touching the right shoulderof the man on his left. Close interval betweenmen is measured from right to left by the man onthe right placing the heel of his left hand on hisleft hip just below the belt line, fingers and thumbjoined and extended downward, and his elbow inline with his body and touching the arm of theman on his left. Double arms interval betweenmen is measured from right to left by the man onthe right holding his left arm and hand shoulderhigh, fully extended. The man to his left obtainsdouble arms interval by holding his right arm andhand shoulder high, fully extended, so that theirfinger tips touch.

e. Column is a formation in which the elementsof a command (other than a platoon) are onebehind the other, except when the squad is in acolumn of twos or part of the next larger unit.

f. File is a column which has a front of onlyone element.

g. Distance (fig. 35) is the space between ele-ments in column. Normal distance for men is the

101

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 103: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 35. Distance, interval, front, and depth.

space from the back of a man to the chest of theman immediately to his rear when they haveformed in line, obtained normal interval, and facedto the right or left.

h. Head is the leading element of a column.i. Cover is alining yourself directly behind the

man to your immediate front while maintainingproper distance.

j. Flank is the right or left side of any forma-tion as sensed from an element of that formation.

102

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 104: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

k. Front is the space from side to side of a for-mation, including the right and left elements(fig. 35).

1. Measurements of an individual normally are12 inches in depth and 22 inches in width.

m. Depth is the space from front to rear of aformation, including the front and rear elements(fig. 35).

n. Base is the element on which a movement isplanned or regulated.

63. FormationsThe squad has three prescribed formations-a

line (1, fig. 36), a column (file) (2, fig. 36), anda column of twos (3, fig. 36).

a. The squad forms in line with squad leaderon the right.

b. The squad normally marches in column (2 and3, fig. 36), but it may march in line for short dis-tances only. When it is part of a larger unit, thesquad normally marches in column (file) as shownin 2, figure 36.

c. When the squad drills as a separate unit, thesquad leader takes a post three steps in front ofand centered on the squad when it is in line; andthree steps to the left and centered on the squadwhen it is in column (file) or in column of twos.

Section II. SQUAD DRILL

64. To Form the Squad

a. To form at normal interval (fig. 37) the squadleader assumes the position of attention and com-mands FALL IN.

103

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 105: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

--- 4- -INTERVAL

LINE (RANK)

- I , 0 O O q D r-] D1-0- DISTANCE

COLUMN (FILE)

0

COLUMN OF TWOS

[] SQUAD LEADER [ SQUAD MEMBER

0 FIRE TEAM LEADER ,0 DIRECTION TROOPSARE FACING

Figure 36. Squad formations.

b. When the squad forms as a separate unit, thenext senior member assumes the number one posi-tion which is the right flank man. At the com-mand FALL IN, the number one man positionshimself so that the squad, when formed, will bethree steps in front of and centered on the squadleader. The number one man immediately raiseshis left arm laterally at shoulder level, fingers andthumb extended and joined, palm down, with headand eyes to the front. The number two man takeshis position immediately to the left of number one

104

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 106: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

and on line, his right shoulder touching numberone's fingertips; he turns his head and eyes to theright for alinement and raises his left arm. Assoon as proper interval has been obtained, thenumber one man drops his left arm to his side.The number two man turns his head and eyes tothe front when he is alined. Other members ofthe squad form in the same manner as the numbertwo man. The left flank man does not raise hisleft arm.

c. When the squad is part of a larger unit, thesquad leader is the right flank man.

d. To form at close interval (fig. 38) the com-mand is AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN. The for-mation is completed like normal interval, exceptthat close interval is obtained as described in para-graph 62d.

e. When armed, the men fall in at the order.Weapons are inspected after falling in by the com-mands INSPECTION, ARMS; PORT, ARMS; andORDER, ARMS.

65. To Dismiss the Squad

a. The squad is dismissed only from a line for-mation with the men at attention.

b. With armed troops, the commands are INSPEC-

TION, ARMS; PORT, ARMS; DISMISSED.c. With unarmed troops, the command is DIS-

MISSED.

66. To Change Interval While in Line

a. To obtain close interval from normal interval,the command is CLOSE, MARCH. On the command

105

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 107: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 37. Normal interval.

of execution, the right flank man stands fast. Allmen to his left face to the right in marching fromthe halt, march forward until they have obtainedthe approximate close interval, halt, and face tothe left. The squad then forms at close intervalwithout command, as explained in paragraph 64d.

b. To obtain normal interval, the command isEXTEND, MARCH. At the command MARCH,all men except the right flank man face to the leftin marching from the halt, march forward untilapproximately normal interval is obtained, halt,and face to the right. The squad then forms atnormal interval without command, as explainedin paragraph 64b.

c. To obtain double-arm interval from normalinterval, the command is TAKE INTERVAL, MARCH.

106

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 108: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 37-Continued.

This movement is executed as when extending, ex-cept that the double-arm interval is obtained byeach man raising both arms and touching thefingertips of the man on his right. Drop yourright arm when the interval has been obtained;your left arm when the man on the left drops hisright arm. Turn your head and eyes to the frontas you drop your right arm. In executing thismovement, the right flank man does not raise hisright arm and the left flank man does not raisehis left arm. With armed troops, sling arms isgiven before commanding this movement.

d. To obtain normal interval from double-arminterval, the command is ASSEMBLE, MARCH.

Execute this movement like CLOSE, MARCH, butform at normal interval.

107

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 109: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 88. Close interval.

67. To Aline the Squada. To aline the squad at normal interval, the

commands are DRESS RIGHT, DRESS; READY,FRONT. These commands are given only whenthe men are at order arms or sling arms. At thecommand DRESS, each man except the right flankman turns his head and eyes to the right andalines himself on the right flank man. Each manexcept the left flank man extends his left arm,and each man positions himself by short right orleft steps until his right shoulder touches the fin-gertips of the man on his right.

108

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 110: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 38-Continued.

b. At the command DRESS, the squad leadermarches by the most direct route to a position online with the squad, one step from the right flankman, halts on line, and faces down the line. Fromthis position he verifies the alinement of the squad,ordering men to move forward or backward asnecessary, calling them by name or number; e.g.,Private Jones, forward 2 inches; number eightman, back 4 inches. The squad leader remains atattention, taking short steps to the right or left asnecessary to see down the squad. He does not usehis arms or twist his body. Having checked the

109

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 111: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

alinement, he faces to the right in marching, haltsthree steps in advance of the squad, executes leftface, and commands READY, FRONT. At the com-mand FRONT, the men drop their arms to theirsides and turn their heads and eyes to the front.The squad leader then marches to his front untilhe is centered on the squad where he halts andfaces the squad.

c. To aline the squad at close interval, the com-mands are AT CLOSE INTERVAL, DRESS RIGHT, DRESS;READY, FRONT. The movement is executed as de-scribed in a and b above, except that close intervalis obtained by placing the left hand on the hip atthe beltline, fingers and thumb extended and joined,pointing downward, elbow on line with the body.This command is given only when there is approxi-mate close interval between elements.

d. To dress the squad in column, the commandis COVER. At this command, each man covers theman in front of him and obtains the approximatedistance.

68. To March in Column from Squad in Line at theHalt

a. The commands are RIGHT (LEFT), FACE;FORWARD, MARCH. These movements are executedas explained in chapter 3.

b. When at close interval, the squad is extendedto normal interval before being faced and marchedoff.

69. To Change the Direction of a Column

a. The command is COLUMN RIGHT (COLUMN

110

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 112: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

LEFT, COLUMN HALF RIGHT, COLUMN HALF LEFT),

MARCH.b. From a halt, at the command COLUMN RIGHT

or COLUMN HALF RIGHT, MARCH, the leading mantakes a 30-inch step to the front with his left foot(which will allow following men to pivot on ap-proximately the same point on the ground), turnsto the right on the ball of his left foot, and stepsoff in the indicated direction, taking a full stepwith his right foot. All other men march forwardand turn in the same manner as the leading man,following in column until another command isgiven. On the command COLUMN LEFT .(COLUMN

HALF LEFT), MARCH from a halt, the leading manfaces to the left in marching, pivoting on the ballof his right foot and, at the same time, steps offin the new direction with a full step with his leftfoot. All other men march forward and pivot onapproximately the same point on the ground.

c. When marching, the preparatory commandand command of execution for each movement aregiven so they end on the foot in the direction ofthe turn; COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH and COLUMN

HALF RIGHT, MARCH are given as the right footstrikes the ground and COLUMN LEFT, MARCH andCOLUMN HALF LEFT, MARCH as the left foot strikesthe ground. The interval between the preparatorycommand and the command of execution is onestep. At the command MARCH, the leading manexecutes a face-in-marching from the march bytaking one more step, pivoting on the leading foot,and takes a full step off of the pivot in the indi-cated direction. All other men execute the same

111

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 113: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

movement in succession on approximately the samepoint.

d. While marching, the command INCLINE TOTHE RIGHT (LEFT) is given for changes ofdirection where a column movement is not appli-cable. The leading man changes direction as com-manded. All other men turn in the same way asthey come to the point on which the leading manturned. This is not a precision movement.

70. March to the Flank

When it is desired to move a unit to the flankfor a short distance while marching at quick time,the commands are RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, MARCH.The preparatory command and the command ofexecution end when the foot in the indicated direc-tion of march strikes the ground. The intervalbetween the preparatory command and the com-mand of execution is one step or count. At thecommand MARCH, each man takes one more step,turns in the indicated direction of march on theball of his leading foot, and steps off in the newdirection with his trailing foot. This movementis used to march a unit to the right or left for ashort distance and is not executed from the halt.

71. To Count Off in Line or Column

a. For drill purposes, counting off is executedonly from right to left in line and from front torear in column. The command is COUNT, OFF.

b. When in line, at the command of execution,all men except the man on the right flank turntheir heads and eyes to the right and the right

112

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 114: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

flank man counts off ONE. After the man on theright counts off his number, the man to his leftcounts off the next higher number, at the sametime turning his head and eyes to the front. Thenumbers are counted in the cadence of quick timefrom man to man. All movements are made in aprecise manner.

c. When in column, at the command of execu-tion, each man in succession (starting with theleading man) turns his head to the right andcounts off his number over his right shoulder. Hethen turns his head back to the front. The lastman in column keeps his head and eyes to the front.

72. To Stack Arms

a. The members of the squad stack arms fromtheir positions in line at normal interval on thecommand of STACK, ARMS. After the squadcounts off, the leader designates the stackmen bynumbers then gives the command PREPARE,

SLINGS.b. At the command SLINGS, the stackman

places the butt of his rifle on his right hip andcradles it in the crook of his right arm (1, fig. 39).He then adjusts the sling keeper to form a 4-inchloop (a palm's width within the loop) next to theupper sling swivel (2, fig. 39). As soon as he hasprepared the loop, the stackman returns to orderarms. After all stackmen are at order arms, thecommand, STACK, ARMS is given.

c. At the command ARMS, the stackman placeshis rifle directly in front of and centered on hisbody with the sling facing to the front (1, fig. 40).

748-141 0 - 64 - 8 113

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 115: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 1A s'

Figure 89. Preparing sling to stack arms.

The heel of the rifle butt is on the ground on linewith the toes of his shoes. The stackman graspsthe rifle by the handguard with his left hand. Thefirst two fingers of the left hand hold the innerpart of the loop against the rifle. He reaches acrossthe front of the rifle with the right hand, graspsthe outer part of the loop, and holds it open forthe insertion of the other rifles (2, fig. 40). Heholds the rifle vertical at all times.

114

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 116: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure C39-Continiued.

115

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 117: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. After the base rifle has been positioned, themen right and left of the stackman perform thefollowing movements simultaneously:

(1) The man on the stackman's left raises androtates his rifle, sling up, to a horizontalposition across his body, muzzle to theright. At the same time, he grasps therifle at the small of the stock with hisleft hand, palm downward, over the sling.He continues to grasp the upper part ofthe handguard with his right hand. Helets both arms hang naturally, holding theweapon in a horizontal position (3, fig. 40).

(2) The man on the stackman's right moveshis rifle vertically and across his body withhis right hand until his wrist is shoulderhigh in the center of the body. He graspsthe weapon with his left hand immediatelyunder the right hand, palm over the sling.He then lowers his right hand to the smallof the stock, palm facing the sling; andturns the rifle until the sling is up, muzzleto the left, and the rifle is in a horizontalposition. He lets his arms hang naturally(3, fig. 40).

(3) As soon as both men have completed thesemovements each moves his foot, that isnearest the stackman, 18 inches to theoblique and toward the stackman. In acontinuing motion, the man on the stack-man's left inserts the muzzle of his rifleinto the loop held by the stackman untilthe bayonet stud protrudes past the far

116

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 118: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 40. Stack arms.

end of the loop (4, fig. 40). He holds his·weapon in this position until the man onthe stackman's right inserts the muzzle ofhis rifle through the loop in the same man-ner and above the muzzle of the rifle ofthe left man (4, fig. 40).

e. When both rifles have been inserted into theloop, the men on each side of the stackman swingthe butts of their rifles outward and down to theground until the stack is tight with the rifle butts

117

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 119: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Closeup of loop in sling

Figure 40-Continued.118

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 120: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

119

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 121: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 40-Continued.

on line and approximately 2 feet from the baseline(5, fig. 40).

f. After necessary adjustments have been made,all three men come back to the position of attention(5 and 6, fig. 40).

g. Extra rifles are passed to the nearest stack onthe right. As each rifle is passed, it is grasped atthe upper part of the handguard with the righthand. Then, with the rifle held vertical, it ispassed with fully extended arm to the right front.The man on the right grasps the rifle at the bal-ance with his left hand, brings the rifle to the cen-

120

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 122: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 40-Continued.

ter of his body, and regrasps it at the upper part

of the handguard with his right hand. This actioncontinues until the stackman receives the rifle and

places it on the stack with his right hand as nearlyvertical as possible. He places the rifles on the

stack with the slings away from the stack.

73. Take Arms

a. The squad in position, on line behind thestacks, takes arms at the command TAKE, ARMS.

121

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 123: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 40-Continued.

b. At the command ARMS, the stackman passeseach extra rifle towards its bearer. The rifles arehandled in the manner described for passing themto the stack (left hand at the balance, right handat the upper part of the handguard). As the menreceive their weapons, they resume the position oforder arms.

c. After all extra rifles have been returned, thestackman grasps the base rifle, holding the loopopen as in stack arms.

d. The men to the right and left of the stackmantake one step to their left and right fronts, respec-tively. They reach down and grasp their rifles,

122

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 124: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

bringing them to a horizontal position. They graspthe rifles as shown in 4, figure 40. The man to theright of the stackman frees his rifle from the stackfirst. Each man returns to order arms after re-trieving his rifle. He does this by guiding andsteadying the rifle with his left hand as in the nextto the last count of order arms (fig. 17).

e. The stackman adjusts the sling of his riflebefore returning to order arms.

74. To Form a Column of Twos from a File andRe-Form

a. When at a halt and in file, the command isCOLUMN OF TWOS TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), MARCH.

b. On the preparatory command, the number oneteam leader commands STAND FAST. The num-ber two team leader commands COLUMN HALF LEFT

(HALF RIGHT). On the command MARCH, thenumber two team leader executes a column halfleft (right), then inclines right (left), haltingabreast of the number one team leader at normalinterval on the command TEAM, HALT.

c. When in a column of twos at the halt, thecommand to re-form is FILE FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT),

MARCH.d. On the preparatory command, the number one

team leader commands FORWARD. The numbertwo team leader commands STAND FAST. Uponthe command of execution MARCH, the numberone team marches forward. The number two teamleader commands COLUMN HALF RIGHT (LEFT),

MARCH, and then inclines right (left) to followthe number one team at normal distance.

123

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 125: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

75. To March to the Oblique

a. To march to the oblique when marching in acolumn formation at quick time, the command' isRIGHT (LEFT) OBLIQUE, MARCH. The word"oblique" is pronounced to rhyme with strike.

b. When teaching units to march to the oblique,the squad leader first alines the unit and has eachman execute a half right (left) face. The squadleader points out each man's position and explainsthat each man is to maintain this position whilemarching by keeping his shoulders parallel to theman in front (fig. 41).

c. At the command of execution MARCH, givenon the foot in the direction of turn, each man takesone more step in the forward direction, faces tothe half right (left) in marching, and steps offwith the trailing foot and continues the march ina direction of 45 ° angle to the right (left) of theoriginal direction of march.

d. The command FORWARD, MARCH is given toresume the original direction of march from march-ing in the oblique. At the command MARCH,take one more step, pivot on the ball of the leadingfoot in marching, and continue to march to theoriginal front. When marching at oblique, theonly command that may be given is FORWARD,

MARCH, given on the foot in the direction of theturn.

124

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 126: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

NEW DIRECTIONOF MARCH

ORIGINAL DIRECTIONOF MARCH

I II-

r'I

I I

I

Figure 41. Right oblique.

125

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 127: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 6

THE PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL

76. General

a. Upon completion of the first phase of dis-mounted drill, your squad is merged with othersquads into a platoon where you learn other move-ments.

b. The platoon consists of a platoon headquartersand two or more sections or squads. The platoonheadquarters consists of a platoon leader and oneor more assistants.

c. The elements (squads) of a platoon are num-bered from front to rear when in line, and fromleft to right when the platoon is in column.

77. Drill Terms

To help understand the meaning of certain drillterms in this chapter, the following definitions aregiven:

a. Platoon base for a platoon in column is thesquad behind the platoon guide.

b. Guide is the man responsible for maintainingthe prescribed direction and rate of march for theplatoon. The platoon sergeant is the guide. When

126

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 128: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the platoon is in line at the halt, the guide's posi-tion is always on the right flank of the platoon andat normal interval to the right of the first squadleader. The guide does not change his positionwhen the platoon is marched for short distancesin a line formation. When the platoon is in acolumn formation, the guide's position is in frontof the right squad leader, at normal distance.

c. Platoon line is a formation in which the ele-ments (squads) of a platoon are in column andabreast of each other (1, fig. 42). A suggested lineformation for the weapons platoon is depicted in 3,figure 42.

d. Platoon column is a formation in which theelements (squads) of a platoon are in column andabreast of each other (2, fig. 42). A suggestedcolumn formation for the weapons platoon is de-picted in 4, figure 42.

e. Post is the correct place for an officer or non-commissioned officer to stand in a prescribed for-mation.

78. Rules for the Guide

a. The guide of a unit is always on the right.b. When a platoon in line is given the command

RIGHT, FACE, the guide executes right face withthe platoon. Then he immediately faces to theright in marching, marches forward, halting infront of the right squad leader, and executes leftface.

c. When a platoon in column is given the com-mand FILE FROM THE LEFT, MARCH, on the pre-

127

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 129: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I ED cE o o E o o o oE

0 ] cE o o Eo o o o

[E0 El Ec Eo o E Eo oE El

6 STEPS

RIFLE PLATOON IN LINE

l0000000000S SOS000000

RIFLE PLATOON IN COLUMN

Figure 42. Platoon formations.

paratory command, the guide takes his position infront of the left file so that he is at the head of thecolumn.

d. When a platoon in column is given the com-mand COLUMN OF TWOS FROM THE LEFT, MARCH,on the preparatory command, the guide takes hisposition in front of the second file from the leftso that he is at the head of the right file of the

128

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 130: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I Il o o o-o o-o F-f

D -Fo F- F- o o

6 STEPS

WEAPONS PLATOON IN LINE

0

~®~000000IF10 000n

WEAPONS PLATOON IN COLUMN

~ PLATOON LEADER I SQUAD MEMBER

PLATOON SERGEANT W RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR

SECTION LEADER _ DIRECTION TROOPS ARE FACING

' SQUAD LEADER

Figure 42-Continued.

column that is to move out. When moving fromone position to the other he faces to the left orright in marching.

e. When re-forming in a column of fours from afile or column of twos, the guide posts himself in

748-141 0 - 64 -9 129

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 131: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

his normal position when the movement is com-pleted.

f. The guide is responsible for setting the direc-tion of march by inclining to the right or leftwhen necessary, and for setting the proper cadence.The leading man of each file is responsible for theinterval.

g. When a platoon is marching in column andthe command to march by a flank or to the rearis given, the guide executes the movement with theplatoon but does not change his position within theplatoon.

79. Squad Drill Applicable to Platoon Drill

The following movements are executed as insquad drill, with the exceptions and additions noted.

a. The platoon is dismissed by the platoon ser-geant in the same manner as the squad.

b. The .,.atoon changes interval while in lineand counts off in the same manner as the squadwith the squad leaders as bases for these movements.When there art' two or more ranks, the men in rearof the first ra'iK cover the corresponding man totheir front in executing these movements. Whenthere is only one rank, the first (or right) squadleader is base. The guide moves to the right wheninterval is taken to the left, and does not count off.

c. The platoon marches from a line in the samemanner as a squad, the guide taking his post asdescribed in rules for the guide (par. 78).

d. The platoon stacks arms as described in para-graph 72 after first opening ranks. The guidepasses his rifle toward the nearest stack to his left,

130

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS

Page 132: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

holding the rifle at the balance with his left handas in taking arms (para. 72d).

e. The platoon executes flank movements in amanner similar to that described for the squad,except when the platoon is at close interval betweenfiles. In this case, it must first be extended to nor-mal interval.

f. To dress the platoon while in column, thecommand is COVER. The base squad leader ob-tains normal distance from the guide. All othersquad leaders obtain normal interval as prescribedin paragraph 64b. All other men in the base squadexecute the movement as in squad drill. At thesame time the remaining men of the platoon alineon the base squad and cover their squad leaderswithout raising their arms.

80. Formations

The platoon has two prescribed formations: acolumn and a line.

a. The platoon forms in line with the squadleaders on the right of their squads (1, fig. 42).In line, with the platoon leader in command, theplatoon sergeant's post is to the right of the rightflank man of the front rank at normal interval.The platoon leader's post is six steps to the frontof and centered on the platoon. When marchingin line, the guide and squad leaders are on theright. The platoon marches in line for short dis-tances only.

b. When the platoon sergeant is performing theduties of the platoon leader, the senior squad leaderassumes the duties and post of the platoon sergeant.

131

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 133: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. In the column formation, the platoon leaderis in front of the left file, the platoon sergeant infront of the right file, all at normal distances whenpart of a larger unit. When the platoon is drillingas a separate unit, the platoon leader is six stepsto the left and centered on the left flank of theplatoon as described for the squad leader (3, fig.36). The platoon normally marches in columnwith the guide and squad leaders at the head.

Section II. PLATOON DRILL

81. To Form the Platoon

a. The platoon is usually formed at normal in-terval by the platoon sergeant with the command,FALL IN.

b. At this command, the squad leader of the firstsquad posts himself so that the first squad, whendressed on him, will be centered on and be three30-inch steps from the platoon sergeant. Othersquad leaders cover the first squad leader at nor-mal distance. The members of the squads fall inon their squad leaders as prescribed in squad drill.Exact interval is taken only by the first squad.Men in the rear squads raise their left arms, takeapproximate interval only, and cover the corre-sponding man in the front rank. Radiotelephoneoperators and attached personnel fall in at the leftof the platoon to even the length of the ranks with-out disrupting the organization of the squads.

c. When the platoon is formed, the platoon ser-geant commands INSPECTION, ARMS; PORT, ARMS;ORDER, ARMS. On his next command, REPORT,

132

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 134: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the squad leaders in succession from front to rear,salute and report in one of the following manners:"All present," or "Private Jones and CorporalSmith absent." Each squad leader executes therifle salute (looking to the front) at order armsand holds the salute until the platoon sergeantreturns it at the completion of the report. Ifarmed, the platoon sergeant returns each squadleader's salute by executing the rifle salute fromright shoulder arms. He looks toward the squadleaders. The platoon sergeant then faces aboutand reports to the platoon leader, "Sir, all present;or, all accounted for; or (so many), men absent."The platoon leader and platoon sergeant exchangesalutes, the platoon leader executing the hand sa-lute. The platoon sergeant then faces about, facesto the half left in marching, and takes his post tothe right of the right flank man in the first squad,executes order arms, and faces about. He marchesto his post in the most direct manner.

d. To form at close interval, the command isAT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN. The formation isexecuted as described in b above, except that closeinterval is obtained as described in paragraph 64d.

82. To Aline the Platoon

a. When in line, the platoon is alined similarlyto the squad (para. 67). The platoon leader verifiesthe alinement.

b. To aline the platoon, the command is DRESS

RIGHT, DRESS, or AT CLOSE INTERVAL, DRESS RIGHT,

DRESS, given by the platoon leader. On thecommand of execution DRESS, the squad leader

133

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 135: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

of the first squad momentarily glances to the rightto aline himself on the guide, then turns his headand eyes back to the front. The guide raises hisleft arm during alinement. Other squad leadersobtain normal distance.

c. All men except the left flank men raise theirleft arms when alining. Only the first squad ob-tains the exact interval. All other squads get ap-proximate interval; each man covers the man tohis front and, at the same time, alines himself onhis squad leader.

d. At the command DRESS, the platoon leadermarches by the most direct route to the right flankof the platoon, halts on line and one step from theguide, and executes right face. He then alines thefirst squad as described in paragraph 67. Afteralining the first squad, the platoon leader faces inmarching, taking two short steps to the next squad,halts, executes right face, and alines the squad inthe same manner as the first squad. He does notincline behind the guide. He alines all othersquads in the same manner.

e. After alining the last squad, the platoonleader faces in marching from the halt and movesto a position three steps in advance of the platoonflank, halts, faces to the left, and commands,READY, FRONT. He then moves by the most di-rect route to his post six steps in front of andcentered on the platoon. The right platoon leaderassumes his position by halting with his left footforward. He then pivots to his front on the ballof his left foot, and brings his right foot alongsidehis left foot. All other platoon leaders execute

134

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 136: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

this movement similarly except that they halt withtheir right foot forward, pivoting to the front onthe ball of the right foot, bringing the left footalongside the right foot.

83. To Open and Close Ranks

a. When in line at normal interval, the platoonopens ranks for stacking arms or other purposesat the command OPEN RANKS, MARCH. At thecommand MARCH, the front rank takes two stepsforward, the second rank takes one step, and thethird rank stands fast. Each rank executes dressright on halting. If there are more than threeranks, the fourth rank takes two steps backward,the fifth rank takes four steps backward, and thesixth rank takes six steps backward. The platoonleader verifies the alinement as described in para-graph 82.

b. To close ranks, the command is CLOSE RANKS,

MARCH. At the command MARCH, the frontrank stands fast. The second, third and succeed-ing ranks take one, two, three or more steps for-ward respectively, maintaining cover and aline-ment.

84. To Change Interval While in Column

a. When in column at normal interval, at a halt,or in march at quick time, to obtain close intervalbetween files the command is CLOSE, MARCH.

b. At the halt, on the command MARCH, thebase squad stands fast. The other squads obtainclose interval by taking two, four, and six rightsteps respectively, and cover their squad leaders.

135

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 137: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. When marching, the command CLOSE, MARCHis given on the right foot. At the commandMARCH, the right squad takes up the half step.Other men face to the half right in marching andmarch until close interval is obtained. Then theyface to the half left in marching, and take up thehalf step when abreast of the corresponding num-ber of the base squad. At the command FORWARD,

MARCH, all squads resume the 30-inch step.d. To obtain normal interval between files, when

the platoon is in column at close interval, at a halt,or in march at; quick time, the command is EXTEND,

MARCH. This movement is executed like closemarch, but in the opposite direction.

85. To Change the Direction of a Column

a. To change the direction of a column, the com-mand is COLUMN RIGHT (COLUMN LEFT, COLUMN

HALF RIGHT, or COLUMN HALF LEFT), MARCH,given at the halt or while marching in column.The base element during the turn is the squad onthe flank in the direction of the turn. The pivotman for this movement is the first man in the basesquad, exclusive of the platoon leader or the pla-toon guide. When COLUMN RIGHT (HALF RIGHT),

MARCH is commanded from a halt, the guidefaces to the right (half right) in marching at thecommand of execution.

b. The base squad executes this movement as insquad drill, except that each man takes up the halfstep after executing the face-in-marching until thecorresponding men in the other squads comeabreast.

136

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 138: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. All other squads execute two column halfrights (lefts); the first half column movement ismade at the line where the first rank executes theturn; the second, upon reaching a line runningthrough the base squad's pivot, and parallel withthe new front. Men in squads other than the basetake up the half step as they come abreast of thecorresponding men in the base squad. When allthe men in a rank are abreast, they step off withthe 30-inch step without command.

d. The command INCLINE TO THE RIGHT(or LEFT) is given for changes in direction wherea column movement is not applicable. This is nota precise movement. After completing the turn,the base squad leader covers the guide and theplatoon dresses on the base squad. The base isnormal and not changed by the direction of turn.

86. To Form a File and Re-Form from a Halt

a. When the platoon is in a column of two ormore files at a halt, it forms a single file at thecommand FILE FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.

b. The squad leader of the designated lead filegives the supplementary command FORWARD,and the other squad leaders command STANDFAST. (When forming a file from the left, theguide positions himself in front of the left file onthe preparatory command, FILE FROM THE LEFT.)

c. On the command of execution, the leadingsquad marches forward. The squad leader imme-diately to the left (right) of the base squad com-mands COLUMN HALF RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH and,after starting the movement, inclines to the left

137

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 139: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

(right) without command, following the line ofmarch of the preceding squad. The remainingsquad leaders command COLUMN HALF RIGHT(LEFT), MARCH, and COLUMN HALF LEFT (RIGHT),

MARCH so as to follow the preceding squads atnormal distance. The squad leaders give theircommands of execution to set their squads in marchwhen the right foot of the marching squad strikesthe ground. The squad leaders glance over theirshoulders to see when the first half column move-ment should be given.

d. A column movement may be executed and afile formed from a column formation by the com-mand FILE FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT), COLUMN RIGHT

(LEFT), MARCH. The squad leader of the squadleading the movement gives COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT)

instead of FORWARD after the preparatory com-mand, and the other squad leaders give STANDFAST. The remaining squad leaders commandCOLUMN RIGHT (COLUMN LEFT), MARCH as the lastman in the preceding squad reaches the pivot point.

e. When in file at a halt, to re-form in the origi-nal column, the command is COLUMN OF TWOS

(FOURS) TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), MARCH.f. On the preparatory command, the squad leader

of the base (leading) squad commands STANDFAST. All other squad leaders command, COLUMN

HALF LEFT (RIGHT).

g. At the command MARCH, the base (leading)squad stands fast. All other squads execute thecolumn half left (right) simultaneously. Thesquad leader immediately in rear of the base squadthen inclines to the right (left) without command.

138

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 140: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

The other squad leaders command COLUMN HALF

RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH and SQUAD, HALT, so asto bring their squads abreast of the base (leading)squad.

87. To Form a Column of Twos from a Column ofFours and Re-Form from a Halt

a. When in a column of fours at a halt, to forma column of twos, the command is COLUMN OF TWOS

FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.b. On the preparatory command, the squad lead-

ers of the two squads which are to move out firstcommand FORWARD. The other two squadleaders command STAND FAST. The guide po-sitions himself in front of the right squad of thetwo squads which are to move out.

c. On the command of execution, the two rightsquads march forward. The other two squads moveinto the column of twos at normal interval at thecommands COLUMN HALF RIGHT (COLUMN HALF

LEFT), MARCH, COLUMN HALF LEFT (COLUMN HALF

RIGHT), MARCH, given by the squad leader nextto the two moving squads.

d. A column movement may be executed whileforming the column of twos from a column offours in the same manner as described in para-graph 86.

e. When in a column of twos at a halt, to re-formin the original column of fours, the command isCOLUMN OF FOURS TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), MARCH.

f. On the preparatory command, the two leadingsquad leaders command STAND FAST. The tworear squad leaders command COLUMN HALF LEFT

139

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 141: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

(RIGHT). On the command MARCH, the two lead-ing squads stand fast. The two rear squads exe-cute COLUMN HALF LEFT (RIGHT), MARCH, COL-

UMN HALF RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH, halting atnormal interval abreast of the base squads on com-mand of the squad leader nearest the base squads.

88. To Form for Shelter Tents and Re-Form

a. Shelter tents are pitched in line and in for-mation only for purposes of instruction and forformal field inspections or the display of equip-ment. Normally, in bivouac, full use is made ofavailable cover and concealment, and straight linesare avoided.

b. The platoon is formed in one line for pitchingshelter tents. Squad lines may be used when onlya small space is available.

c. When the men are armed with rifles, the riflesare slung before forming for shelter tents.

d. When the platoon is in line, form it in onerank for pitching shelter tents by commandingFORM FOR SHELTER TENTS, MARCH.

e. At the command FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS, theradiotelephone operator moves at double time be-hind the platoon to a position on the right of theright man of the front rank.

f. At the command MARCH, the first squadtakes two steps forward and halts. All othersquads face to the left in marching and continuemarching in quick time. Squad leaders move theirsquads into line, abreast of the squad or squadsalready on the line, by giving the commands RIGHT

FLANK, MARCH; SQUAD, HALT. Squad leaders

140

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 142: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

may use their squad number preceding the prepara-tory commands.

g. At the commands TAKE INTERVAL, MARCHand COUNT, OFF, given by the platoon leader, theentire rank executes these movements as previouslydescribed. The base for these movements is thesquad leader of the first (right) squad. The radio-telephone operator and guide take interval to theright and do not count. The radiotelephone oper-ator is regarded as an odd-numbered man, theguide as an even-numbered man.

h. On the platoon leader's command, MARKFRONT TENT POLE, the odd numbers drawtheir bayonets with their left hands and thrustthem into the ground, beside the outside of theirleft heel at the instep. The bayonet marks theleft edge of the tent pole. Men not equipped withbayonets mark the place with left edge of theirleft heel. Odd-numbered men pitch tents with theeven-numbered man to their left (Nos. 1 and 2,Nos. 3 and 4).

i. To re-form, the commands are ASSEMBLE,

MARCH; RIGHT, FACE; COLUMN OF TWOS (FOURS)

TO THE RIGHT, MARCH. These movements areexecuted as previously described. The guide andradiotelephone operator resume their normal posi-tions as soon as the platoon is re-formed in column.For the method of pitching shelter tents and dis-playing equipment, see FM 21-15. For drill pur-pose where equipment is not displayed, the com-mand SECURE EQUIPMENT is given to retrievebayonets.

141

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 143: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 7

THE COMPANY

Section I. GENERAL

89. General

a. The training received in the first (squad) andsecond (platoon) drill phases is combined into thethird phase-company drill.

b. A company consists of a company headquar-ters and 'two or more platoons. For dismounteddrill and ceremonies, the company headquarterspersonnel are attached to the platoons to equalizeplatoon strength without interfering with the per-manent squad organization.

c. Posts for key personnel in company forma-tions are as follows:

(1) Company in line (fig. 43).(a) Company commander. Twelve steps to

the front and center of the company.(b) Guidon bearer. One step to the rear

and two steps to the left of the companycommander.

(c) Platoon leaders. Six steps to the frontand center of their platoons.

(d) Platoon sergeant (platoan guide). Nor-

142

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 144: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mal interval to the right of the frontrank squad leader.

(e) Executive officer. Normal distance tothe rear of the left flank man, rear rankof the left platoon.

(f) First sergeant. Normal distance to therear of the left flank man, rear rank ofthe second platoon.

(2) Company in column with platoons in col-umn for drill purposes (fig. 44).

(a) Company commander. Six steps infront of and centered on the leadingplatoon, or centered on the left flank ofthe company in a position to best con-trol his unit. His distance from theflank should not exceed 12 steps (fig.44). If the company commander movesto the left flank of the unit, the guidonbearer remains at the head of the column.

(b) Guidon bearer. One step to the rearand two steps to the left of the companycommander.

(c) Platoon leaders. Normal distance infront of the squad leader of the left filesquad of their platoons.

(d) Platoon sergeant (platoon guide). Nor-mal distance in front of the squad leaderof the right file squad.

(e) Executive officer. Normal distance tothe rear of the last man in the right fileof the rear platoon.

(f) First sergeant. At normal distance to

143

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 145: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

v_ o

4.

Wt~~~ Wn144 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 4

(U Ca.Z UIJ

-H HHw

0) HU)~~~~~~~~~~~

+0

mu

I-+0~~~~~~~

144

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 146: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

it 6 STEPS

3 STEPS

= '- 12 _

STEPS

ALTERNATE

Figyure 44. Company in col'nmll with platoons in columin.

748-141 0 -64 - 10 145

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 147: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

12 STEPS

Figure 46. (Superseded) Company in column with platoonsin line.

Figure 45. Company in column with platoons in line.

the rear of the last man in the right fileof the second platoon, or as the companycommander directs.

(3) Company in column with platoons in line(fig. 45).

(a) Company commander. Twelve stepsfront and center of the first platoon.

146 (b) Guidon bearer. One step to the rear

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 148: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

and two steps to the left of the companycommander.

(c) Platoon leaders. Six steps front andcenter of their platoons.

(d) Platoon sergeants (platoon guides).Normal intervals to the right of theright flank man of the first squad.

(e) Executive officer. At normal distance tothe rear of the squad leader of the rearplatoon.

(f) First sergeant. At normal distance tothe rear of the left flank man of therear platoon.

(4) Company in mass (fig. 46).(a) Company commander. Six steps to the

front and center of the company.(b) Guidon bearer. One step to the rear

and two steps to the left of the com-pany commander.

(c) Platoon leaders. Normal distance infront of the left file of their platoons.

(d) Platoon sergeants (platoon guides).Normal distance in front of the rightfile of their platoons.

(e) Executive officer. Normal distance inrear of the last man of the right file ofthe left platoon.

(f) First sergeant. Normal distance in rearof the last man of the right file of thesecond platoon.

d. When the company commander directs thatthe company open and close ranks, aline, stack and

147

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 149: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

6

STEPS

Figure 46. Company in mass formation.

148

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 150: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

take arms, close on the leading platoon, and pre-pare for inspection, the movements are executed onthe command of the platoon leaders, not on thedirectives of the company commander. The com-mander's directive describes the movement to becommanded by the platoon leaders.

e. The right platoon is base platoon for drillpurposes.

90. Supplementary Commands

a. Except for movements in mass formation,platoon leaders repeat all preparatory commandsof the company commander, including the manualof arms, except when the command is COMPANY.In this case they come to attention and commandPLATOON prior to the company commander'scommand of execution. The company commanderallows enough time for the supplementary com-mands before giving the command of execution(para. 8).

b. To change the direction of a column, the lead-ing platoon leader repeats the company command-er's preparatory command, the other platoon leaderscommand CONTINUE THE MARCH, or STANDFAST, whichever is appropriate.

c. No supplementary commands are given formass drill. They are given, however, when form-ing a mass or when forming a column from a mass.No supplementary commands are given for thecompany commander's commands AT EASE,REST, FALL OUT, or other combined commands.

149

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 151: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Section II. COMPANY DRILL

91. To Form the Company

a. At the command FALL IN, the company isformed in line of platoons in line with three-stepintervals between platoons (fig. 43).

b. The company may be formed by the companycommander or the first sergeant. When the com-pany is formed by the company commander, pla-toon leaders insure that their platoons are formedas shown in figure 43. No report is required.When the first sergeant forms the company he postshimself nine 30-inch steps in front of the centerand facing the line where the front rank of thecompany is to form, and commands FALL IN.

c. The platoon sergeants take their posts so thatthe company will be centered on and at proper dis-tance from the first sergeant. They face their pla-toons and allow for five 30-inch steps betweenplatoons.

d. The first squad leaders take their posts rela-tive to the platoon sergeant and the platoons formin two or more ranks with normal interval as de-scribed in paragraph 80.

e. With armed troops, the first sergeant and pla-toon sergeants are at right shoulder arms.

f. The platoons are formed and the platoon ser-geants receive the report from the squad leadersas described in paragraph 81. Each platoon ser-geant faces about after receiving the reports. Ifnecessary the first sergeant repositions himself be-fore taking the report from the platoon sergeants.

150

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 152: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

g. When all platoon sergeants are facing to thefront, the first sergeant commands REPORT. Theplatoon sergeants report in succession from rightto left, "All present; or all present or accountedfor; or (so many) men absent." The first sergeantand platoon sergeant turn their heads toward eachother when salutes are exchanged.

h. All platoons having reported, the first ser-geant commands POSTS. The platoon sergeantsface about, face to the half left in marching, moveto their posts by the most direct route, halt, exe-cute order arms, and face about.

i. The first sergeant then faces about, salutesand reports to the company commander, "Sir, allpresent"; or, "Sir, all present or accounted for";or, "Sir, (so many) men absent." When his saluteis returned, he faces about without command andmoves directly to his post. The company com-mander is 3 steps from the first sergeant when thereport is made, or 12 steps from the first rank ofthe company.

j. As the first sergeant faces about and moves tohis post, the executive officer and platoon leaderstake their posts. The platoon leaders move aroundthe left flank of their respective platoons.

k. Men required to make a report salute whilereporting and hold the salute until it is returned.The person receiving the report does not returnthe salute until the report is completed.

I. On the command AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALLIN, the company forms with close interval betweenmen, but the interval between platoons remains atthree steps.

151

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 153: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

m. When the platoons are not organized intosquads, the platoon sergeant commands INSPECTION,

ARMS; PORT, ARMS; RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS im-mediately after falling in, and calls the roll. Eachman answers "Here" as his name is called, andcomes to order arms.

92. To Dismiss the Company

When the company is in line with platoons inline (fig. 43) at attention, it is dismissed in eitherof the following ways:

a. The company commander commands FIRST

SERGEANT. At the command FIRST SERGEANT, thefirst sergeant moves by the most direct route to aposition three steps in front of the companycommander, halts, and salutes. The companycommander returns his salute and commandsDISMISS THE COMPANY. Salutes are againexchanged. The company commander then fallsout and the executive officer, platoon leaders, andguidon bearer fall out at the same time. As theplatoon leaders fall out, the platoon sergeants postthemselves in front of their platoons. The firstsergeant faces about and commands DISMISSYOUR PLATOONS. The platoon sergeants sa-lute. When the first sergeant returns the salute,they face about and dismiss their platoons by thecommands INSPECTION, ARMS; PORT, ARMS;DISMISSED.

b. The company commander commands DIS-MISS YOUR PLATOONS. The platoon leaderssalute. The company commander returns theirsalute and he, the executive officer, the first ser-

152

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 154: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

geant, and guidon bearer fall out. The platoonleaders salute. The company commander returnstheir salute and he, the executive officer, the firstsergeant, and guidon bearer fall out. The platoonleaders then face about and command PLATOON

SERGEANT. On the command PLATOON SERGEANT (if

he is at order arms he comes to right shoulderarms) he posts himself three steps in front of hisplatoon leader and salutes. The platoon leaderreturns the salute and gives the command of exe-cution, DISMISS THE PLATOON. Salutes areagain exchanged and the platoon leader falls out.The platoon sergeant then faces about and dis-misses the platoon as described in a above.

93. To Aline the Companya. The company is alined on the directive

DRESS RIGHT from the company commander.When he gives this directive, all platoon leadersface about. The right platoon leader commandsDRESS RIGHT, DRESS, and alines his platoon as de-scribed in paragraph 82b. When the alinement ofthe first rank of the right platoon has been verified,the platoon leader to the left of the right platooncommands DRESS RIGHT, DRESS, and alines fromthe flank of his platoon farthest from the rightplatoon. All other platoon leaders aline their pla-toons in the same manner as the second platoon,waiting until the first rank of the platoon to theirimmediate right has been alined.

b. When necessary, platoon guides step off thethree-step interval at the command GUIDE, VERIFY

INTERVAL, given before the command DRESS RIGHT,

DRESS.

153

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 155: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

94. To Open and Close Ranks

a. To open ranks, the company commander di-rects OPEN RANKS. All platoon leaders faceabout on this directive. The right platoon leadercommands OPEN RANKS, MARCH. At the com-mand MARCH, the platoon opens ranks. as de-scribed in paragraph 83. When the alinement ofthe first rank of the right platoon has been verified,the platoon leader to the left of the right platooncommands OPEN RANKS, MARCH, and alines hisplatoon on the first rank of the right platoon asoutlined in paragraph 93. The commands andmovements for succeeding platoons are identicalto those for the second platoon, but are not exe-cuted until the first rank of the platoon to theirimmediate right has been alined.

b. To close ranks, the company commander di-rects CLOSE RANKS. All platoon leaders faceabout and command CLOSE RANKS, MARCH. Thecommands are given and executed beginning withthe right platoon and proceeding in order to theleft until all platoons have closed ranks, as de-scribed in paragraph 83.

c. To stack arms or ground equipment, the com-pany commander directs, OPEN RANKS ANDGROUND EQUIPMENT, or OPEN RANKSAND STACK ARMS.

95. To Form a Company in Column from Companyin Line, and to Re-Form in Line

a. With the company in line with platoons inline at the halt, the command to form in columnis RIGHT, FACE. The platoon leaders repeat the

154

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 156: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

preparatory command RIGHT and on the commandof execution FACE, face to the right with the unit,then march by the most direct route to their postsat the head of their platoons.

b. The first sergeant takes his post behind theright file man of the second platoon at normal dis-tance. The executive officer takes his post behindthe last man in the right file rear platoon. Theguidon bearer faces with the unit, then comes toport guidon, and double times to his post at thehead of the column.

c. To form in line with the company at the haltin column, the company commander commands,LEFT, FACE. The platoon leaders repeat the pre-paratory command and, on the command of execu-tion, they face with the unit and, without com-mand, march by the most direct route to their postsix steps in front of and centered on their platoons.At the same time the executive officer, first ser-geant, and guidon bearer resume their originalposts as shown in figure 43.

96. Company in Column to Change Direction ofMarch

a. The commands are COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT),

COLUMN HALF RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.b. When halted, the leading platoon leader re-

peats the company commander's preparatory com-mand. Succeeding platoon leaders give the sup-plementary command, FORWARD. On the commandof execution MARCH, the leading platoon executesthe movement as prescribed in paragraph 85, andsucceeding platoons execute the movement on ap-

155

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 157: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

proximately the same ground as the leading platoonon command of the platoon leader.

c. While marching, the movement is executed asdescribed in b above, except that succeeding pla-toon leaders command CONTINUE THEMARCH.

97. To Change Interval

a. When in column, the company commandercommands CLOSE (EXTEND), MARCH. All platoonsexecute the movement simultaneously as describedin platoon drill (para. 84).

b. If executed while marching, the companycommander commands FORWARD, MARCH, afterthe prescribed interval has been obtained.

98. To Form a Column of Twos and Re-Form

a. To form a column of twos when the companyis in column with platoons in column (fig. 44), thecompany commander gives the commands noted inparagraph 87 and allows time for the supplemen-tary commands. These movements are commandedonly from the halt.

b. The leading platoon leader repeats the pre-paratory command. Other platoon leaders com-mand STAND FAST. The leading platoon exe-cutes the movement as in platoon drill on thecompany commander's command of execution.Other platoons execute the movement on their pla-toon leader's commands, given so as to follow withthe normal three-step distance between platoons.Platoon leaders take position as described in para-graph 800.

156

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 158: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. Re-forming is executed simultaneously by allplatoons on the company commander's commandof execution as described in paragraph 87. Pla-toon leaders then march their platoons to the nor-mal three-step distance without a command fromthe company commander.

99. To Form a Company Mass When in Column

a. With the company in column at the halt, orwhile marching with close interval between files,the command is COMPANY MASS LEFT, MARCH.

b. At the preparatory command COMPANY MASS

LEFT, when the company is at the halt, the leadingplatoon leader gives the command STAND FAST;the platoon leaders of succeeding platoons com-mand COLUMN HALF LEFT. At the commandMARCH, the leading platoon stands fast. Theother platoons execute column half left then col-umn half right on command of the platoon leaders,and move to the new position at close intervalalongside the leading platoon. Each platoon ishalted by its platoon leader so that its leading rankis abreast of the leading rank of the platoons al-ready on line. These movements form the companyin mass with close interval between files (fig. 46).

c. When the preparatory command COMPANYMASS LEFT is given during a march, the leadingplatoon leader commands CONTINUE THEMARCH. Platoon leaders of succeeding platoonsgive supplementary commands as noted in b above.Immediately after the company commander com-mands MARCH, the leader of the leading platooncommands PLATOON, HALT, and other platoon

157

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 159: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

leaders complete the movement as described in babove.

100. To Aline a Mass Formation

a. The company commander gives the commandAT CLOSE INTERVAL, DRESS RIGHT, DRESS.

b. At the command of execution DRESS, theplatoon leader of the right platoon moves by themost direct route to the right flank and verifiesthe alinement of as many ranks as necessary toassure proper alinement in a manner similar toverifying the alinement for the platoon (para. 82).When he has completed the verification, he returnsto his position in the front rank. The companycommander then commands READY, FRONT.

101. When in Mass Formation, to Change Directionof March

a. The commands are RIGHT (LEFT) TURN,

MARCH; FORWARD, MARCH. The right (left)flank man of the rank of guides and platoon lead-ers is the pivot for this movement. The movementis executed similar to a platoon column movementexcept that the half step is continued until FOR-WARD, MARCH is given. This command is givenafter the entire company has changed direction andhas arrived on line.

b. When at a halt, the company commanderdoes not face the company to command RIGHT

(LEFT) TURN, MARCH, but gives the commandover his right shoulder. When marching, he turnsand marches backward to give the command, thenturns and marches at the half step in the new

158

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 160: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

direction of march. He turns again and marchesbackward to command FORWARD, MARCH, thenturns and marches forward.

e. In turning to the left, the left file is the baseuntil FORWARD, MARCH is given. Then the dressis right.

102. To Form a Column from a Company Mass

a. When at a halt, the command is COLUMN OF

PLATOONS, RIGHT PLATOON, FORWARD, (COLUMN RIGHT,

COLUMN HALF RIGHT) MARCH. The right platoonleader repeats the preparatory commnand and theother platoon leaders command STAND FAST.At the command MARCH, the right platoonmarches in the direction indicated. All other pla-toons follow in column, executing column half rightand column half left on the commands of the pla-toon leaders.

b. When in march, the commands are the sameas in a above, except that DOUBLE TIME is given bythe company commander and the leading platoonleader instead of FORWARD, and the other platoonleaders command CONTINUE THE MARCH.On the command MARCH, the right platoonmarches out in double time. Other platoon leaderscommand COLUMN HALF RIGHT, DOUBLE TIME,

MARCH and COLUMN HALF LEFT, MARCH tobring the succeeding platoons into a column. Witharmed troops, the company commander commandsPORT, ARMS before commanding this movement,unless at sling arms.

159

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 161: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

103. To Form a Column of Platoons in Line andRe-Form

a. When at the halt with the company in columnwith platoons in column at normal interval, thecompany commander commands COLUMN OF PLA-

TOONS IN LINE, MARCH. The platoon leader ofthe leading platoon commands STAND FAST.All other platoon leaders command COLUMN RIGHT.

Upon the comrnmand of execution, all platoons ex-cept the first platoon execute a column right anda column left so as to obtain a 12-step intervalfrom the platoon on the left when halted on linewith the left platoon.

b. When marching, the leading platoon leadercommands CONTINUE THE MARCH and PLA-

TOON, HALT immediately after the commarnd ofexecution MARCH by the company commander.All other platoons execute the commands andmovements described in a above.

c. After all platoons are in position, the com-pany commander commands LEFT, FACE. Platoonleaders face to the left with their platoons, thentake their posts six steps in front of and centeredon their platoons. The executive officer and firstsergeant move to their positions (fig. 45).

d. To re-form, the company commander com-mands RIGHT, FACE; COLUMN OF PLATOONS, LEFT

PLATOON, FORWARD, MARCH. On the preparatorycommnand. the left platoon leader commands FOR-

WARD and the other platoon leaders commandSTAND FAST. At the command MARCH, theleft platoon marches forward. The remainingplatoons follow in column, executing column left

160

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 162: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

and column right on command of the platoonleaders.

104. To Correct Distance Between Platoons

a. When the company is marching in column orat the halt, and it is desired to obtain the correctdistance between platoons, the commanding officerdirects CLOSE ON LEADING PLATOON.

b. On this directive the leader of the leadingplatoon causes his platoon to take up the half stepif in march, or stand fast if at the halt.

c. Succeeding platoons, if in march, are causedto continue the march, and then take up the halfstep as soon as the correct distance has been ob-tained. At the halt, succeeding platoon leadersmarch their platoons forward and halt them at thecorrect distance.

d. In march, the company commander commandsFORWARD, MARCH, as soon as all platoons have ob-tained the correct distance and have taken up thehalf step. All platoon leaders repeat the prepara-tory command FORWARD.

161

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 163: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 8

INSPECTIONS

105. General

The company is the basic unit for inspection.Battalion and higher commanders or inspectingofficers inspect each company in its own area, orhave it march to a designated place at a specifiedtime for inspection. Under special conditions, anentire battalion is formed and inspected in onelarge formation.

106. Company Inspection

a. Formation.. The company forms either inline of platoons in line (fig. 43) or in column ofplatoons in line (fig. 45). It forms in line of pla-toons in line for inspection of weapons and per-sonal appearance, and in column of platoons inline for inspection of personal field equipment, in-cluding weapons, and personal appearance. Whentransportation is included in the formation, itforms a line 5 yards to the rear or as directed.The drivers remain with their vehicles. Transpor-tation is inspected separately from the foot ele-ments, or as directed.

162

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 164: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. Procedures for Inspecting Weapons and Per-sonal Appearance.

(1) With a company in line of platoons inline, the company commander directsPREPARE FOR INSPECTION. Onthis directive, platoon leaders face aboutand command OPEN RANKS, MARCH, asdescribed in paragraph 94. After verifi-cation of the alinement, the platoon lead-ers march three steps in front of theirplatoons, halt, face to the left (right),and command READY, FRONT. After thismovement has been completed, the rightplatoon leader takes one step forward,halts, faces to the right, and awaits thecompany commander. All other platoonleaders march forward, halt in front ofthe guide of their platoon, and execute aleft face, positioning themselves three stepsin front of the guide and facing the front;and await the company commander.

(2) Ranks having been opened, the companycommander commands AT EASE. Hethen inspects the company. During theinspection, officers, noncommissioned offi-cers, and guidon bearers not in ranks cometo attention at order arms as the companycommander approaches. As soon as theyhave been inspected, they resume the posi-tion of at ease. The company commandermay direct the executive officer or the firstsergeant to join him and take notes duringthe inspection. When so directed, the

163

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 165: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

executive officer or first sergeant placeshimself to the left rear of the companycommander and accompanies him through-out the inspection. The company com-mander, beginning at the right of the line,makes a thorough inspection of the arms,equipment, dress, and appearance of themen. As he approaches each platoon, itsleader brings the platoon to attention andsalutes. The company commander returnsthe salute, inspects the platoon leader,moves around the left of the platoonleader, and halts in front of the first manto be inspected. At this time, the platoonleader executes about face and places him-self at normal interval to the right andone step to the rear of the company com-mander and accompanies him throughoutthe inspection of the platoon. The indi-vidual at the inspecting officer's left rearis in the same relative position.

(3) During the inspection, squads not; beinginspected are given at ease by the platoonleader when directed by the companycommander. The platoon leader calls thenext squad to be inspected to attention atthe appropriate time.

(4) The inspection is made from right to leftin front of and from left to right in rearof each flank.

(5) The company commander moves fromman to man by facing to the right inmarching, taking two short steps so as to

164

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 166: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

position himself in front of the next manto be inspected. He then executes a leftface, facing the man.

(6) Each man individually executes inspectionarms when the company commander is di-rectly in front of and facing him. Thisenables the company commander to observethe manual of the person being inspected.As the company commander moves to therear of the rank being inspected, each man,as he is approached, unfastens the snapon his bayonet scabbard, grasps his bay-onet scabbard with his left hand, andmoves the point of the scabbard slightlyforward so that the company commandermay remove the bayonet for inspection.The scabbard is held in this position untilthe bayonet has been replaced or, if thebayonet is not removed, until the companycommander has moved to the position ofthe next man to be inspected.

(7) To inspect a rifle, the company commandertakes the rifle with his right hand bygrasping it at the forward portion of thestock. As soon as the rifle has beengrasped, the individual being inspected re-leases the rifle and lowers his arms andhands to his sides as in the position ofattention. A suggested method of inspec-tion, for the inspecting officer, follows:lower the rifle with your right hand, keep-ing the barrel to your left, and place thethumb of your left hand on the forward

165

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 167: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

portion of the follower and glance into thebarrel. The thumbnail will reflect enoughlight for the barrel and chamber inspec-tion. After completing the barrel inspec-tion, grasp the small of the stock withyour left hand and raise the rifle to a posi-tion in front of your body, forearms hori-zontal, barrel up and muzzle to your right.Move the rifle to your left, keeping thebarrel horizontal, and -inspect the upperportion of the rifle, beginning with thefront sight and working to the heel of thebutt (moving the rifle to the right). Toinspect the lower portion of the rifle, re-lease your left hand from the small of thestock, and regrasp the rifle with your lefthand just forward of the receiver on thelower handguard. Immediately rotate therifle to the left, grasping it at the smallof the stock with your right hand, palmup. The barrel is down and horizontal.Start this portion of the inspection at thetoe of the butt and work left to the flashsuppressor. As you complete the inspec-tion, release your right hand from thesmall of the stock and apply downwardpressure with your right hand on the slingat the small of the stock. Regrasp therifle with your right hand at the fronthandguard in the original manner. Returnthe rifle to the individual in the sameposition from which it was taken. Thesoldier takes the rifle with his left hand

166

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 168: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

at the balance, immediately closes the bolt,pulls the trigger, and executes order arms.

(8) When the company commander inspectsthe rifle without handli.g it, each man re-mains at inspection arms until the officerhas moved to a position in front of andfacing the next man in line. He thencomes to order arms.

(9) The men armed with the Browning auto-matic rifle, carbine, grenade launcher, andpistol execute inspection arms as prescribedfor each weapon in this manual. Thecompany commander removes the auto-matic rifle from the shoulder of the manbeing inspected and inspects it in the mostconvenient manner. He replaces theweapon on the man's shoulder at the com-pletion of the inspection. He inspects acarbine similar to the inspection of theM1 rifle. He takes a pistol with his righthand and inspects it in the most conven-ient manner. He then returns it to theindividual being inspected. The inspect-ing officer grasps the grenade launcher inthe most convenient manner. It is re-turned in a similar manner. The men re-sume their original positions after theirweapons have been inspected, as outlinedabove.

(10) On completion of the inspection, the pla-toon leader calls the platoon to attention,takes his post three steps in front of theguide, and exchange salutes with the

167

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 169: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

company commander. The platoon leaderthen executes left face and commands,CLOSE RANKS, MARCH. When the rankshave been closed, he moves to a positionsix steps in front and to the center of hisplatoon, faces the platoon, and commandsAT EASE. He then executes about faceand assumes the at ease position.

(11) When the company is inspected by anofficer of higher command, the companycommander, on the approach of the in-specting officer, commands cOMPANY, AT-TENTION. He then faces to the front,salutes the inspecting officer, and reportsby saying, "Sir, Captain Jones reports KCompany ready for inspection." Thesame procedure as outlined above is fol-lowed, substituting the words inspectingofficer for company commander and com-pany commander for company executiveofficer and first sergeant.

c. Procedure for Inspecting Personal FieldEquipment.

(1) The company forms in column of platoonsin line as described in paragraph 103 (fig.45).

(2) The company commander directs PRE-PARE FOR INSPECTION OF EQUIP-MENT. On this directive, all platoonleaders face about and command OPENRANKS, MARCH. All platoon leadersverify the alinement of their platoon fromthe right flank as described in paragraph

168

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 170: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

82. After they verify the alinement, theplatoon leaders march three steps in ad-vance of their platoon, execute left face,and command READY, FRONT. Then thefirst platoon leader commands TAUKE INTER-

VAL, MARCH. On the command of exe-cution, squads take interval as describedin paragraph 66c. As soon as the properinterval has been obtained, the platoonleader commands, UNSLING EQUIP-MENT.

(3) At the command UNSLING EQUIP-MENT, each man draws his bayonet withhis left hand and sticks it into the ground,outside of and against his left heel at theinstep. This marks the line for the rearof his equipment when displayed. Themen not armed with the bayonet mark theplace with their left heel. Each man thenlays his weapon on the ground, muzzle tothe front, barrel to the left, butt near thetoe of his right foot. He unslings hisequipment and places it on the ground athis feet, belt to the rear, the pack in frontof his toes.

(4) The platoon leader then commands DIS-PLAY EQUIPMENT. Equipment is dis-played in the interval to the left of eachman and as prescribed in FM 21-15.When arrangement of the equipment iscompleted, each man resumes his originalposition in ranks and stands at ease.

(5) As soon as the first platoon has completed

169

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 171: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

taking interval, the other platoons takeinterval successively, covering the platoonto their front and preparing for inspectionas described for the first platoon.

(6) When the first platoon has completed prep-aration for inspection, the company com-mander starts inspecting the company asdescribed in b above. He then directs theplatoon leader to have the equipment se-cured and to assemble his platoon.

(7) The platoon leader then commands SE-CURE EQUIPMENT. Each man as-sembles his equipment and, leaving hisequipment in its position on the ground athis feet, assumes the position of at ease.

(8) After the equipment is assembled, the pla-toon leader commands SLING EQUIP-MENT. On this command, the men slingtheir packs, fasten their belts, take theirweapons, and assume the position of orderarms.

(9) The platoon leader then assembles his pla-toon, closes ranks, and takes his post atthe front and center of the platoon.

(10) In units which have special combat equip-ment such as machineguns, mortars, andsignal or command post equipment, thecompany commander directs DISPLAYMACIHINEGUN (MORTAR, or other)EQUIPMENT after packs have beenopened or after the individual inspectionhas been completed. The gun squads, un-der the direction of their leaders, break

170

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 172: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

ranks and display their weapons and ac-cessories for inspection as prescribed inthe gun drill for the weapons. The gunor equipment is displayed in the rear ofits vehicle. Headquarters personnel dis-play the fire control, communication, andany other combat equipment. When notransportation is present, the equipment isdisplayed three steps from the flank ofeach squad on the side from which the in-terval was taken. The rear of the equip-ment is placed on line with the rear edgeof the individual field equipment.

107. Battalion Inspectiona. For the inspection of individual weapons and

appearance the battalion is formed in a column ofcompanies in line. For the display of equipment,it is formed in line with companies in column ofplatoons in line. Before the inspection, the battalioncommander indicates whether heavy weapons andspecial equipment are to be displayed for inspectionor left on their transportation.

b. When all companies are in the appropriateformation with all troops dismounted, the battalioncommander directs PREPARE FOR INSPEC-TION. At this command, the company command-ers face about and prepare their companies as de-scribed in paragraph 106, except that the companiesare not put at ease.

c. Next, the battalion commander commandsREST. He then inspects his staff and the colorguard. When the battalion commander approachesthe staff, the officers come to attention without com-

171

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 173: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mand. When they have been inspected, they ac-company the commander. As the commander ap-proaches the color guard, the color bearer com-mands COLOR GUARD, ATTENTION. The colorguard does not come to the position of inspectionarms as the officers approach, nor does the com-mander actually inspect the color guard's weapons.The color guard may be dismissed as soon as in-spected.

d. The battalion commander, beginning at thehead of the column (right of the line), makes aninspection of the arms, dress, appearance (equip-ment) of the personnel of the several companies.

e. As the commander approaches each company,its commander faces toward his company and com-mands COMPANY, ATTENTION, faces to the front,salutes, and reports as in paragraph 106b(11). Assoon as he has been inspected, he faces about andcommands AT EASE. He then accompanies thebattalion commander. The inspection proceeds asdescribed for company inspection.

f. The battalion commander may direct the com-pany commanders to make the detailed inspectionof the arms or other equipment of their companies.He may require officers of his staff to assist in theinspection, especially by checking equipment.

g. When a company has been inspected, the bat-talion commander may direct that it be dismissedor proceed with other duties.

h. When desired, the battalion commander maydirect that companies not under inspection stackarms, fall out and resume their places in time tobe inspected.

172

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 174: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

i. When the battalion commander is not the in-specting officer, he prepares his battalion for theinspection and commands REST. On the approachof the inspecting officer, the battalion commanderbrings the battalion to attention, faces to the front,salutes, and reports. The inspecting officer inspectsthe battalion commander, who then commandsREST. He accompanies the inspecting officerthroughout the inspection of his battalion.

173

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 175: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 9

THE BATTALION AND THE BRIGADE

Section I. GENERAL

108. Introduction

a. The formations of the infantry battalion andbrigade are prescribed in this chapter. They arerecommended as a guide for the correspondingunits of the other arms and services and for higherunits.

b. The brigade does not drill by command of thebrigade commander. Its battalions form and marchunder the battalion commanders as directed by thebrigade commander. When practicable, the forma-tion and movement of the subdivisions of the bat-talion and brigade are made clear to the unit com-manders before starting the movement.

c. When in mass formation, the battalion drillsby command. Such drill is limited to movementsfor ceremonies where the units of the battalionexecute the manual, facings, and marchings as onebody at the command of the battalion commander.These movements are executed by the battalion ina manner similar to that prescribed for the com-pany.

174

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 176: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. The assembly of units in mass formation isdirected by the battalion commander. Each com-pany commander moves his company to its placein the most convenient manner.

e. To assume any formation, the battalion orbrigade commander announces the desired forma-tion, the flank position for the right (or left) ofthe battalion or brigade, and the direction in whichthe line or column is to face. The units approachthe line on which the battalion or brigade formsin column or line formations. On completion ofthe movement the companies are given AT EASEuntil another movement is ordered.

f. After a battalion is halted the companies makeno movement to correct their alinement or positionunless ordered by the battalion commander.

g. In ceremonies, the units remain at attentionafter the ceremony has started until at ease isordered by the next higher commander of troops.Rest should not be given once the proceedings havestarted.

h. A unit may be presented to its commander orto a reviewing officer. When this is done, the pre-senting officer faces his unit and gives the commandPRESENT, ARMS. Then he faces to the front andsalutes. The members of the presenting officer'sstaff salute and complete the salute as he does.

109. Commands and Orders

The commands or orders of the battalion or bri-gade commander are given orally, by prearrangedsignal, or by means of staff officers or messengerswho transmit them to the commander concerned.

175

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 177: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

BATTALION COMMANDER

T AND STAFF12 STEPS

HEADQUARTERS AND

HEADQUARTERS COMPANY

T12 STEPS

RIFLE COMPANY

12 STEPS COLORS

t

RIFLE, COMPANY

T12 STEPS

Fiure 47. Bttaion RIFLE COMPANY

Figure 47. Battalion in column of companies in column.

1 10. Staff

a. The commissioned staff of a commander formsin one rank, two steps to his rear at normal inter-val. The enlisted personnel of his staff form twosteps to the rear of and covering the officers. When

176

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 178: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

110

o u ~:I-8

U)-+4 -12i 7

a.

F- N

F-

748-141 0 -64 -12 177

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 179: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

only one staff officer is present, he is posted one stepto the right and one and one-half steps to the rearof the commmander. Staff members usually are ar-ranged from right to left in order of rank, thesenior on the right; however, the commander mayhave them arranged in any desired order.

b. When necessary to reduce the front of thestaff, as in marching, it may be formed in as manyranks as necessary, maintaining normal distancebetween ranks, following the commander. The staffmarches under the direction of the senior staffofficer.

Section II. THE BATTALION

111. Formations

a. The battalion forms in column (fig. 47), in linewith companies in line (fig. 48), in line with com-panies in mass (fig. 49), in mass (fig. 50), or forinspections, in line of companies, each companybeing formed in column of platoons in line (fig. 45).

b. The band is posted by the adjutant as shownin figures 48 and 49.

c. The attached units take their position as di-rected by the battalion commander. They conformto the formation and movements of the other unitsof the battalion.

d. Regardless of the direction the battalion faces,the companies are designated numerically fromright to left in line and from front to rear in col-umn; that is, first company, second company, thirdcompany.

178

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 180: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

t18 STEPS

RIFLE RIFLE RIFLE HQ HQ

Co CO CO co BAND

6 STEPS 12 STEPS 6 STEPS 12 STEPS

Figure 49. Battalion in line of companies in mass.

-ii18 STEPS

* A; A; I Ai Al6 STEPS

RIFLE RIFLE RIFLE HO HO

Lt ~~t t -CLOSE INTERVAL

Figure 50. Battalion in mass formation.

e. The terms "right" and "left" apply to rightand left as the troops face.

f. The designation "center company" indicatesthe center or the right center company according

179

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 181: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

to whether the number of companies is odd or even.g. The battalion commander supervises the for-

mation from such positions as best enable him tocorrect alinements, intervals, and distances. Withhis staff (less the adjutant), he takes his post intime to receive the report.

112. To Form in Column

The battalion forms in column from a line ofcompanies in line by executing right face. Thebattalion commander prescribes the formation, thedirection the company will face, the hour of form-ing, the location of the head of the column and theorder in column of the battalion headquarters com-pany, attached units, and trains. At the appointedtime, the company commanders form their units asprescribed. They place their units in column andreport their arrival in place to the battalion com-mander or his adjutant (fig. 47).

113. To Form in Line with Companies in Line (forceremonies)

a. Before the ceremonies, the adjutant sees thatthe battalion position on the parade ground ismarked with as many flags and markings as areneeded. One flag is placed on each flank of theline on which the battalion is to form. The adju-tant takes his initial post for the ceremony ninesteps to the right of the right flank marker facingdown the line.

b. When a band is to participate in the cere-monies, the adjutant prearranges a signal or a spe-cific time for adjutant's call to be sounded. The

180

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 182: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

left flank man of the band is 12 steps to the rightof the right flank marker as shown in figure 48,and 3 steps to the right of the adjutant.

c. Companies are marched in column of threes(fours), from the left flank of the battalion posi-tion so as to arrive successively at a position par-allel to and in rear of the line. The command ofexecution for their movement is so timed that theywill step off at the first note of the music follow-ing adjutant's call. The line of march is farenough from the line on which the battalion is toform to permit alinement of the guides of the rightcompany by the adjutant. As each company ar-rives in rear of its position, it is halted and facedto the left. The company commander then com-mands GUIDES ON LINE. At this command,the guides of each platoon double time at port armsto their positions on the line of flags (final line),come to order arms, and execute right face in orderto face the adjutant. The adjutant alines the guidesof the right company; the guides of the other com-panies cover the guides already on the line. Assoon as the guides have established themselves onthe line, the company is moved to the line ofguides. The company commander halts the com-pany so the right man of the front rank halts withhis chest approximately 6 inches from the guide'sright arm. If the company is at right shoulderarms, the company commander gives ORDER, ARMS.The company is then alined as prescribed in com-pany drill. On the command DRESS RIGHT, DRESS,the right man of the front rank moves forwarduntil his chest touches the guide's right arm.

181

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 183: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. When the units have reached their positionson the line, the band stops playing. The adjutantthen moves by the most direct route to a positionmidway between the line of company commandersand the battalion commander. He halts and facesthe battalion.

e. When all units are dressed, the adjutant com-mands GUIDES, POST. At this command, the guidesmove to their positions in ranks by taking one stepforward, executing a face to the right while march-ing, advancing the right foot one step and bringingthe left foot alongside the right foot. They thenface about.

f. The adjutant then commands PRESENT,

ARMS, faces the battalion commander, salutes,and reports, "Sir, the battalion is formed."

g. The battalion commander returns the saluteand commands POST. The adjutant passes to thebattalion commander's right and takes his post online with the staff. The battalion commander thencommands ORDER, ARMS. He may then commandseveral movements in the manual of arms.

A. The commander of troops may direct a readyline be established in rear of the final line. Theselines are approximately 30 steps apart. This per-mits the commanders to form their units on theready line in the same formation as on the final line,prior to adjutant's call. When adjutant's call hasbeen sounded, first the guides and then the troopsare moved to the final line on the commands oftheir commanders from right to left. The readyline may be used for any formation.

182

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 184: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

114. To Form in Line with Companies in Mass For-mation (for ceremonies)

The procedure is the same as in forming the line,except that-

a. The companies are marched from either flank ofthe battalion position in columns of threes (fours)along a line in rear of the line on which the bat-talion is to form. When opposite its place in line,each company successively executes column left(right). As soon as this column movement hasbeen initiated, the company commander ordersGUIDE (OF LEADING PLATOON) ON LINE.At this command the guide of the leading platoonmoves out at double time (at port arms) to the linemarked by the flags. He halts there, comes toorder arms, and faces the adjutant. The guidemarks the right of the company. The companycommander then gives COMPANY MASS LEFT,

MARCH. The command is timed so that the lead-ing platoon halts short of but close to the line ofguides. The remaining platoons successively moveinto position at the designated interval on the leftof the leading platoon (fig. 49).

b. At the command GUIDES, POST, the guidesmove to their positions in ranks by executing aface to the left in marching.

115. To Form the Battalion in Mass

The procedure is the same as in forming in lineexcept that companies are marched from eitherflank of the battalion position in column of threes(fours) at close interval without distance betweenplatoons. Officers and a guide comprise the front

183

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 185: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

rank (fig. 50). The line of march is in rear of theline on which the battalion is to form. W'hen op-posite its place in line, each company executes col-umn left (right). As soon as this column move-ment has begun, the company commander com-mands GUIDE ON LINE. The guide moves out,the company is halted, and the guides take theirposts as described previously.

116. To Dismiss the Battalion

a. The battalion commander commands DIS-MISS YOUR COMPANIES.

b. The company commanders salute the battalioncommander, march their companies to the place ofdismissal, and dismiss them as described previ-ously.

c. After the companies march off, the battalioncommander dismisses his staff.

d. In case the battalion commander desires torelease the companies to their commanders, withoutprescribing that the companies be dismissedpromptly, he commands TAKE CHARGE OFYOUR COMPANIES. The company commanderssalute the battalion commander and take charge oftheir companies.

Section III. THE BRIGADE

117. Formations

a. The brigade forms in column with the bat-talions in column, in column with the battalionsin mass, in line with the battalions in mass, or inline with the battalions in line of company massesas shown in figures 51 and 52.

184

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 186: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. The separate companies of the brigade usuallyare grouped as a provisional battalion. When notgrouped as a provisional battalion, these units formon the left of the brigade when it is in line or atthe rear when it is in column (figs. 51 and 52).

118. To Form the Brigade

a. The brigade commander announces-

(1) The formation (with or without vehicles).

(2) The place and time of the formation.

(3) The direction the units will face.

(4) The color battalion.

(5) The uniform and equipment of troops.

(6) The reviewing officer.

(7) The commander of troops.

(8) The provisional battalion commander.

(9) The frontage and depth of troops for uni-formity.

(10) The order in which units will be formedon the ready and final lines.

(11) Ceremonies.

b. Before forming the brigade, the brigade com-mander has the positions marked on which thelarger (battalion) elements are to form.

c. On arrival at their designated places on theready line, the battalions and separate companiesof the brigade are given rest.

d. For ceremonies, the procedure for the forma-tion of a battalion is followed as described previ-ously except that the battalion adjutants take their

185

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 187: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

BRIGADE _ BRIGADECOMMANDER COMMANDER

12 STEPS AND STAFF 12 STEPS AND STAFF

BAND BAND

36 STEPS 36 STEPS

BATTALION BATTALION

36 STEPS

36 STEPS

BATTALION

L ATTALION 36 STEPS -{ Eg COLORS

36 STEPS COLORSLS COLBATTALION

~~~~~~ABATTALIONBATTALION 36 STEPS <36 STEPS

36 STEPS BATTALION

BATTALION

Figure 51. Brigade in column.

posts at adjutant's call on the final line on whichthe brigade is to form. They face down the linefrom their positions, which are six steps from thepoint where the right flanks of their respectivebattalions will form. When all units of their bat-talions are on line, they move to their posts bythe most direct route.

186

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 188: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

$ 36STEPS

18 STEPS 18 STEPS

STEPS TEPP

I~~2-~~ ~BANDSTEPS

BATTALION BATTALION BATTALION BATTALION

Figure 52. Brigade in line with battalions in massformation.

e. The brigade adjutant acts for the brigade ina manner similar to that prescribed for the bat-talion adjutant previously except that his post onthe final line is three steps to the right of the rightbattalion adjutant and three steps to the left of theleft flank man in the band.

f. When a commander or adjutant gives a direc-tive which is to be executed by troops under thecommand of another commander (when a brigadeadjutant causes the troops to be brought to atten-tion), he gives the command in a conversationaltone of voice, but loud enough to be heard dis-tinctly by the subordinate commanders. The com-mand is not separated into a preparatory commandand a command of execution, nor does he give thecommand so as to cause it to be executed prema-turely.

187

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 189: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

119. To Dismiss the Brigade

To dismiss the brigade, the commander ordersthe commanders of the battalions and separatecompanies of the brigade to dismiss their units.The procedure is the same as described previously.

188

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 190: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 10

CEREMONIES

Section I. REVIEWS

120. General

a. A review is a military ceremony held-(1) In honor of a visiting higher commander,

official, or dignitary.(2) For presenting decorations, awards or

honors to members or units of a command.(3) To allow a higher commander, official, or

dignitary to observe the state of trainingin a command.

b. A review may consist of the following sixparts:

(1) Formation of troops.(2) Presentation and honors.(3) Retreat (if scheduled).(4) Inspection (passing around the troops).(5) Decoration and awards (if scheduled).(6) March in review.

c. A commander normally designates an officerof his command as commander of troops so thatthe commander may review his own troops or ac-company a visitor reviewing the troops. The com-

189

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 191: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mander of troops is responsible for the prepara-tion and organization of his troops for the review.Whenever the national anthem or To The Color isplayed as part of a ceremonial formation, the com-mander of troops faces the reviewing party andsalutes.

d. The line on which the troops are to be formedand the route of march are marked or designated.Flags or appropriate markings are used to markthe post of the reviewing officer, and are also placedsix steps to the left of the reviewing officer todesignate the point where EYES, RIGHT is com-manded and executed, and are placed far enoughto the right of the reviewing officer to designatethe point where the command READY; FRONT isgiven (fig. 53).

e. Any of the formations described for the bat-talion or brigade may be used. The formation usedis limited by the space available and the formationin which the units pass in review. The formationmay be modified to meet the local situation. Eachunit should be sized uniformly with the tallest menin front and on the right.

121. Formation of Troops

a. Battalions and brigades are formed as shownin figures 54 and 55. In reviews in which two ormore arms (:infantry, artillery) are present, thetroops are arranged as ordered by the commanderof troops. As a guide, units should be arrangedfrom right to left in line with the slowest unit onthe right (usually infantry) and progress to themost rapidly moving anit on the left.

190

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 192: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

- 1 6 STEPS

20 STEPS

P____.________ _p_._ ..... ..... 1>

I LINEABOUT

00 STEPS MARCH

4

LINE OF TROOPS

Figure 53. Preparation for review.

b. The troops move to their position in the mostconvenient manner. For large reviews the com-mander of troops prescribes the routes and timeof arrival. When the frontages of the units havebeen measured and marked, the units may arrivein any convenient order and occupy their place inline. When this is not done, the units form suc-cessively from right to left along the line. Thefirst method is preferable in large mixed commands.

c. When commanders are mounted in vehicles,they dismount and take their posts as prescribed

191

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 193: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

or as directed. They remain at their posts fromthe time their units arrive on the line until thecommand PASS IN REVIEW.

d. In motorized or mechanized units or elements,occupants of vehicles usually are required to formdismounted in a formation corresponding to thatof the other units in review. At the commandPASS IN REVIEW, they break formation, moveat double time, and mount their vehicles.

e. An adjutant, designated by the commander oftroops, forms the troops in a manner similar tothat described for a battalion or brigade, as de-scribed previously. After all units are formed andalined, the adjutant brings the units to attention(if at rest or at ease), and then command PRESENT,

ARMS, for a battalion size review, or for largerreviews, he directs, "Present arms." When thetroops have come to present arms, he faces thecommander of troops, salutes, and reports, "Sir, thebattalion (brigade) is formed."

f. When the formation consists of one brigade(two or more battalions), at the direction of theadjutant, the battalion commanders and specialunit commanders bring their units to present arms,starting with the center or right center battalionand continuing simultaneously toward both flanks.

g. In formations consisting of two or more bri-gades, the brigade commanders repeat the directiveof the adjutant, starting with the center brigadeand continuing simultaneously toward both flanks.The battalion and special unit commanders withintheir respective brigade then bring their units topresent arms as in f above.

192

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 194: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

i__. I L I 1--I I l I1- 1BAND IS FACED AND TROOPS

MARCHED TO INDICATED

POSITION BEFORE MARCH

IN REVIEW COMMENCES '

I - - ----- _-,----- --_

REVIEWING OFFICER

Figure 54. Battalion review, companies in line, marched inreview in column of platoons in column.

h. Units and individuals not armed with riflesexecute the hand salute at the command PRESENT,

ARMS, and end the salute at the command, ORDER,

ARMS. They remain at attention during the exe-cution of the manual of arms.

i. The commander of troops and his staff taketheir position midway between the leading rank ofthe unit commanders and the post of the reviewingofficer, facing the line of troops. The commanderof troops returns the salute of the adjutant andorders him to take his post. (The members of thestaff do not salute with the commander of troopswhen the troops are presented to him.) The com-mander of troops for units larger than battalions,directs order arms in a conversational tone makingsure that he does not give the directive as a drillcommand. When all units have come to orderarms, he faces the reviewing stand. The membersof his staff march to their positions to his rear atthe commands of the senior staff officer (fig. 56).

748-141 0 -64 -13 193

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 195: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

~I I~~~~ I'

' XLi_ :

I I o

EI-+ I

aI UI

I II I E

D I .

zU I

m 2o-

1 m i Er--I \

L__. we

194

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 196: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

-I

zL 1I .

'---w1

X F L o ° I 1

1 L-

4 I

_a s3a

I D

I -

195

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 197: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

j. When the staff has reversed its position, thecommander of troops faces the formation and, ifthe reviewing officer has not taken his post, directsat ease. If the reviewing officer has taken his post,he directs present arms, faces the reviewing officer,and commands STAFF, PRESENT ARMS. He and hisstaff present arms together. The ceremony thenproceeds as outlined in paragraph 123.

122. Reviewing Party

a. When the formation has been completed, thereviewing officer with his staff moves to his positionopposite the center of the line of troops to receivethe review (fig. 57).

b. The local commander (if not acting as com-mander of troops), distinguished persons invited toaccompany the reviewing officer but not themselvesreceiving the review, staffs, and enlisted personneltake positions facing the troops as shown in figure57. When an organization is reviewed before aninspecting officer or other person junior in rank tothe local commander, the junior takes position tothe left of the local commander, unless the com-mander desires to accede the place of honor to thereviewing officer.

c. An officer from the local staff is designated toescort distinguished persons and to show them theirpositions. When a civilian receives the review, hetakes position on the right of the local commander;if necessary, timely explanation of the ceremony ismade to him.

d. As the reviewing officer moves to his position,

196

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 198: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the commander of troops faces his troops andbrings them to attention.

123. Presentation and Honors

a. The commander of troops brings the troopsto present arms as soon as the reviewing officer hastaken his post. When the grade of the reviewingofficer entitles him to honors, each brigade or sepa-rate battalion color salutes at the command PRE-

SENT, ARMS, given by the commander of the bat-talion with which the colors are posted or by thecommander of the battalion to the right of thecolors when they are not posted with a battalion.The national color renders no salute.

b. Honors are given the reviewing officer, whenhis grade so entitles him, as prescribed in AR600-25. The band (a designated band near thecenter of the command, if more than one band ispresent) or field music sounds the honors whenthe commander of troops faces, the reviewing officerand salutes with his staff. The reviewing officer,the members of his staff, and all military spectatorssalute at the first note of the music and hold thesalute until the music and gun salute are completed.When the honors are completed, the commander oftroops and his staff end their salute. He thenfaces about and brings the troops to order arms.If the national anthem was played as part of thehonors, or if the ceremony includes decorations andawards, he orders at ease. The ceremony then pro-ceeds with retreat (if scheduled), inspection, deco-rations and awards (if scheduled), and march inreview. If the national anthem was not played as

197

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 199: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

frowL

0z

o-

I O °Q O

0

Lo

Lu

198

oon I-· Egg aL :

0 I a,z 1 u F

198 ~ i

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 200: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

part of the honors, and decorations and awards arenot scheduled, the commander of troops then facesthe reviewing officer and, after a slight pause, heagain faces the troops and directs present arms. Hethen faces the reviewing officer and commandsSTAFF, PRESENx, ARMS. He and his staff salute,and the band plays the national anthem. The re-viewing officer and his staff, and all military spec-tators salute at the first note of the music. Thecommander of troops commands STAFF, ORDER,

ARMS, without facing about. He then faces aboutand brings the troops to order arms and at ease.The ceremony then proceeds as scheduled. The in-spection and decorations and awards may be omittedfrom the ceremony.

c. If the reviewing officer is not entitled to hon-ors, the presentation proceeds as above except thatthe brigade colors do not salute persons of lowerrank than the brigade commander. As soon asthe reviewing officer returns the salute of the com-mander of troops, the command is brought to orderarms and at ease and the inspection follows. Nomusic is played as part of honors, but if decora-tions and awards are not scheduled the nationalanthem is played after the command has been pre-sented to the reviewing officer.

d. When artillery is present in the review andwhen the commander of troops deems it practica-ble, a salute is fired in the manner prescribed inAR 600-25. The first gun is fired with the firstnote of the music. The detachment firing the saluterejoins its unit after the salute is fired. Use of thegun salute is limited to special ceremonial occa-

199

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 201: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

sions when it is desired to stage an especially im-pressive ceremony.

124. Inspection

a. On completion of the presentation and honors,the reviewing officer and his party move forwardand halt six steps in front of the post of the com-mander of troops. The two exchange salutes.Their staffs do not salute. The commander of'troops then guides the reviewing party around theformation, beginning with the unit on the rightof the line, passing in front of the line and thenaround the rear of the formation. In division-sizereviews, the reviewing party passes between theline of brigade commander and staffs and the lineof battalion commanders and staffs. For brigade-size reviews, the reviewing party passes betweenthe line of battalion commanders and companycommanders. In reviews for a battalion or forunits of similar size, the inspecting officer passesbetween the front rank of troops and the line ofcompany commanders. The commander of troopsand the local commander march to the right of thereviewing officer. They are followed by the staffsof the commander of troops, of the local com-mander (if present), and of the reviewing officer.Each staff follows its own commander in file. Ifthe commander of troops directs his staff not toaccompany him, the senior staff officer gives thestaff at ease after the reviewing party has departedand commands attention prior to the return of thereviewing party.

b. The reviewing officer may direct that his staff,

200

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 202: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

flag, and orderlies remain at the post of the review-ing officer.

c. When the inspection is made in motor vehi-cles, the reviewing party enters the vehicles whichdrive up to the post of the reviewing officer aftercompletion of the honors. In each vehicle, oneseat on the right side (the side away from thetroops during inspection) is left vacant. The ve-hicles move to the post of the commander of troopsand stop. The commander of troops exchangessalutes with the reviewing officer, enters the re-viewing officer's vehicle, and occupies the vacantseat. His staff officers occupy the vacant seats inthe remaining vehicles. The orderlies and flagbearer remain at their posts. The vehicles pro-ceed on the route of inspection as already de-scribed.

d. As the reviewing party approaches, eachcompany commander or battalion commander(when the battalion is in mass formation) com-mands attention and eyes right. The guidonbearer executes present guidon. The company com-manders and platoon leaders execute eyes right andgive the hand salute. All troops turn their headsand eyes to the right. As soon as the reviewingofficer comes into their line of vision, they followhim with their eyes, turning their heads, until hereaches their front. At this point, the head andeyes of each man remain fixed to the front. Thecompany commander commands ORDER, ARMS, sothat he and the platoon leaders terminate theirsalutes and the guidon bearer comes to orderguidon when the heads and eyes of the troops

201

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 203: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

reach the front. When the troops are standing atease, each company or massed unit is brought toattention as the reviewing party approaches. Theyremain at attention during the remainder of the in-spection, except that for division-size reviews eachunit may be given at ease after the reviewing partyhas passed by and again brought to attention asthe reviewing party approaches the rear of theunit.

e. The band of an organization plays until theinspection by the reviewing officer is completed.

f. The reviewing officer and those accompanyinghim salute the color only when passing in frontof it.

g. The reviewing officer makes such general in-spection of the command as he may desire whilepassing around the troops. A detailed inspectionis not part of a review ceremony.

h. The commander of troops salutes and haltsafter passing around the line and arriving at theright of the band, unless he is in a vehicle. Thereviewing officer returns the salute and proceedswith his staff to his post. The commander oftroops and his staff move directly to their postsfacing the reviewing officer. When the inspectingparty is in motor vehicles, a stop is made at thepost of the commander of troops, where the com-mander of troops dismounts, exchanges salutes withthe reviewing officer, and returns to his post. Themembers of his staff dismount and return to theirposts at the same time. The vehicles then proceedto the post of the reviewing officer, where the mem-

202

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 204: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

bers of the reviewing party dismount and returnto their posts.

125. Decoration and Awards

a. A review ordinarily is held on occasions of thepresentation of decorations or of the decoration ofthe colors.

b. After the reviewing officer has inspected thetroops and resumed his post, the commander oftroops, from his own post, commands or signalsby prearranged signal: PERSONS TO BE DECORATED

AND ALL COLORS, CENTER, MARCH. At the com-mand MARCH persons to be decorated and allcolors move by the most direct route and take theirposts as follows:

(1) The persons to be decorated take positionsas a single rank in the front and center ofthe command and 10 steps in front of theline of company commanders. They lineup according to the rank of the decorationsto be conferred, highest ranking decora-tion on the right. Those receiving similardecorations take position according to theirmilitary rank within each decorationgroup.

(2) The colors to be decorated are placed ina single rank five steps in front of thecenter of the line of persons to be deco-rated. They are alined in groups accord-ing to the rank of decoration to be be-stowed, the highest ranking decoration onthe right.

(3) All other colors with the color guards are

203

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 205: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

alined in a single rank five steps back ofthe center of the persons to be decorated.They take the same relative positions astheir locations in the command.

(4) The staff of the commander of troops un-der command of the senior staff officerexecutes right face and moves to the rightfar enough to provide clearance for thecolors and persons to be decorated. Thestaff then halts and executes left face.

(5) The commander of troops takes his postfive steps in front of the center of theleading element. When the staff hascleared the necessary line of march, thecommander of troops commands FORWARD,

MARCH. At the command MARCH, thecommander of troops, the persons to bedecorated, and the colors advance, theband playing. The commander of troopsmarches directly toward the reviewingofficer. The guide is center in all ranks.When the commander of troops hasreached a point ten steps from the review-ing officer, he halts the group with thecommand DETACHMENT, HALT. He thensalutes the reviewing officer and reports,"Sir, the persons (colors) to be decoratedare present." The reviewing officer re-turns the salute and directs that the com-mand be presented.

(6) The commander of troops passes arQundthe right flank of the persons or colors tobe decorated and proceeds directly to his

204

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 206: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

post. On reaching his post, he brings thetroops to present arms, faces about, andsalutes, his staff saluting with him. Ifthe national anthem has not been playedas part of the honors, the band (field mu-sic) then plays the national anthem (orTo The Color). On completion of themusic, or after a slight pause if the na-tional anthem is not played, the com-mander of troops and his staff terminatetheir salute, and the commander of troopsbrings the troops to order arms and hasthem stand at ease. The persons to bedecorated salute at the first note of thenational anthem (or To The Color) andterminate the salute at the last note.

(7) The reviewing officer, accompanied by hisstaff or certain members of his staff, ad-vances by the most direct route to theright flank of the line of persons or colorsto be decorated. A staff officer reads theindividual citations when the reviewingofficer approaches each individual. Thestaff officer pauses between reading cita-tions to permit the reviewing officer to pinthe medal on the left breast pocket of theindividual or fasten the streamer on thestaff of the guidon or colors. As the re-viewing officer approaches the guidon tobe decorated, the guidon bearer executespresent arms so the reviewing officer mayfasten the streamer. He executes orderguidon after the guidon has been deco-

205

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 207: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

rated. Color bearers lower the colors tobe decorated far enough for the reviewingofficer to fasten the streamer. The colorbearer gathers the colors around the staffso they cannot touch the ground. He re-sumes the carry after the colors have beendecorated. When the last award has beenpresented, the reviewing party returns toits position in the reviewing stand anddirects the commander of troops to marchthe command in review. At this time, thesenior person decorated moves the personsdecorated to a position in line with andsix steps to the left of the reviewing party.The colors return to their posts by themost direct route. The commander oftroop)s moves to the right to allow thecolors to move in the most direct route totheir post. After the colors have passed,he returns to his original position. Thestaff of the commander of troops then re-turns to its original position.

126. March in Review

a. When the reviewing party is again in placeafter the inspection of the troops, or when thecolors and staff have resumed their posts, the com-mander of troops commands PASS IN REVIEW.

b. At the command PASS IN REVIEW, theband is faced to the right and marches to a positionthat enables it to move straight out on the routeof march without changing direction. The com-mander of the unit next to the band gives the

206

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 208: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

necessary commands to put the troops in marchin the formation designated for the review. Theband starts to play and marches forward at thecommand of execution, given by the commanderof the unit next to the band. Other units move outin succession and follow in column at the pre-scribed distance.

c. The band and each unit change direction atthe points indicated in figure 55. When the unitsare in mass formation, the commander of eachformation (company or battalion) in turn com-mands LEFT TURN, MARCH; FORWARD, MARCH,at each change of direction.

d. The brigade and battalion commanders, otherthan the commander of troops, move into positionin the column at the head of their troops just be-fore the turn on the reviewing line.

e. The commander of troops and his staff takeposition 12 steps in front of the band after theband has turned on the reviewing line.

f. The commander of troops and the brigadeand battalion commanders salute and execute eyesright when they arrive six steps from the front ofthe reviewing officer. They end the salute whentheir staffs have passed six steps beyond the frontof the reviewing officer. Members of their staffssalute with them. The reviewing officer returnstheir salute. Other members of the reviewing partydo not salute.

g. After saluting the reviewing officer, the com-mander of troops turns out of the column andtakes his post on the right side of the reviewingofficer. The members of his staff accompany him

207

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 209: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

and take their posts on the corresponding side ofthe reviewing officer's staff. When the rear elementof his command has passed, the commander oftroops faces the reviewing officer and salutes. Thereviewing officer faces to the right and returns thesalute. Then, accompanied by his staff, the com-mander of troops rejoins the command or dismisseshis staff.

h. When the person reviewing the command isnot mounted in a vehicle, the commander of troopsand his staff (if mounted), turn out of the columnafter passing the reviewing stand and dismountpreparatory to taking post. In such cases, thecommander of troops salutes the reviewing personbefore remounting and before rejoining his com-mand.

i. When the commander of troops and his staffare in vehicles, the vehicles are parked on the sideof the reviewing officer toward the direction ofmarch and behind the lines occupied by the review-ing officer, the commander of troops, and theirstaffs.

j. When the reviewing officer is entitled to honors(AR 600-25) and the review is held before retreat,the drum major of the band, when six steps fromthe reviewing officer, causes the band to interruptthe march while the field music (or trumpet sec-tion of the band) renders the prescribed ruffles andflourishes only. The bandmaster and drum majorexecute and end their salutes at the point prescribedfor the other commanders. Each band, when ithas passed the reviewing officer, executes left turnthree times to take a position in front of and

208

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 210: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

facing the reviewing officer and at least 12 stepsfrom the left flank of the marching troops. Itcontinues to play until the band following it nearsthe post of the reviewing officer. The band thenceases playing, executes a left turn, and leaves thefield, marching parallel- to the troops that havepassed the reviewing officer. The band followingbegins playing as soon as the preceding band hasceased.

k. In large commands, two bands may remainalongside each other after they have turned outof column to alternate in playing while the troopspass in review. Bands may be massed and postedas directed by the commander of troops.

1. When only one band is present, it remains inposition facing the reviewing officer until the re-view has ended. It then follows behind the lastunit.

m. Troops march in review with the guide on theright. Each company commander (or the seniorcompany commander when the battalion is in massformation), without turning his body, commandsEYES, RIGHT; READY, FRONT. He gives the com-mand RIGHT when he is six steps from the frontof the reviewing officer, and FRONT when the lastrank of the unit has cleared the reviewing officerby six steps. In each company or mass formation,all troops except the right flank men execute eyesright without saluting.

n. At the command EYES, RIGHT, the companycommanders and platoon leaders execute eyes rightand render the hand salute. The guidon bearersexecute present guidon and eyes right.

748-141 0 -64 -14 209

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 211: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

o. All end the salute at the command FRONT.The guidons are returned to the carry.

p. The reviewing party and all spectators salutethe colors as they pass by. When the colors passbetween the band (halted) and the reviewing party,the band interrupts the march, sounds ruffles andflourishes only, depending on the rank of the re-viewing officer, and resumes the march. As thecolor guard passes the reviewing officer, each manof the color guard except the right flank man, exe-cutes eyes right at the command of the senior colorsergeant. When the grade of the reviewing officerentitles him to the honor, the brigade or separatebattalion color salutes.

127. Retreat

a. When a review is held at retreat, honors aregiven the reviewing officer as outlined in paragraph123. At the completion of honors, the troops arebrought to order arms and parade rest. The com-mander of troops then commands or signalsSOUND RETREAT to the band or field music.He then faces the reviewing officer, and he andhis staff stand at parade rest. At the conclusionof retreat, the commander of troops faces thetroops and bring them to attention and presentsarms. He then faces the reviewing officer. At thistime either the national anthem or To The Coloris played. If the national anthem has been usedas part of honors for a reviewing officer, or if deco-rations and awards are scheduled, then To TheColor is played after retreat is sounded. Whenthe ceremony is held on an army post, the gun is

210

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 212: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

fired at the last note of retreat, and as the nationalanthem (or To The Color) is played, the flag islowered in the manner prescribed in FM 26-5 andAR 840-10.

b. The commander of troops salutes at the firstnote of the national anthem or To The Color. Hisstaff, the reviewing officer and his staff, and allmilitary spectators salute at the same time. Thesalute is held until the last note of the music. Thecommander of troops, on ending his salute, facesthe troops and brings them to order arms. Theceremony then proceeds with an inspection anddecorations and awards (if scheduled), and marchin review.

c. If the reviewing officer has not arrived at hispost by the scheduled time for retreat, the com-mander of troops proceeds with the retreat cere-mony. He then presents the command after retreatand upon the arrival of the reviewing officer athis post.

d. Honors are not rendered between retreat andreveille, on Sundays, or on national holidays (ex-cept Memorial and Independence Days) unless, inthe discretion of the officer directing the honors,the occasion requires an exception. The person orpersons will be honored at the first available op-portunity thereafter.

Section II. PARADES

128. General

a. A battalion or brigade parade is an alternateand more formal ceremony than a review (para.120).

211

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 213: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. The appearance and movement of troops information are the primary considerations in aparade.

c. Preparation for a parade is similar to that fora review. The organization of troops for a paradeis also similar to that for a review. The distancebetween the troops and the commander for paradeformations is greater than that for a review asthe troop commander is also the reviewing officer.

129. Ceremonial Battalion Parade

a. After the battalion has been formed andalined in one of the previously described forma-tions (fig. 54) and the guides have taken theirposts, the adjutant, before presenting the battalionto the battalion commander, commands PARADE,

REST. When the troops have executed paraderest, he commands SOUND OFF. The adjutantand the battalion commander, with his staff, standat parade rest during the playing of sound off, themarching by of the band, and the sounding of re-treat.

b. At the command SOUND OFF, the band, inplace, plays three chords. At the conclusion ofthe third chord it moves forward, playing a marchin quick time. It executes left turns to marchacross the front of the troops, midway between theadjutant and the line of troops. When the bandhas passed the left of the line, it countermarchesand returns over the same ground to the right ofthe line. After it has passed beyond the right ofthe troops, it executes right turn. When the entireband has passed beyond the front rank of the

212

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 214: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

troops, it again countermarches and halts in itsoriginal position. When the band finishes themarch, it again plays the Sound Off.

c. At an evening parade, immediately after thecompletion of Sound Off, the field music playsRetreat, and the retreat ceremony described inparagraph 127 follows. The adjutant brings thetroops to attention and to present arms at the lastnote of retreat. When all the troops have come topresent arms, he faces the battalion commanderand salutes. The battalion commander and thebattalion staff salute at the first note of the na-tional anthem (or To The Color), and end theirsalute at the last note.

d. At the completion of the national anthem (orTo The Color) with the troops still at present arms,the adjutant again salutes the battalion commanderand reports, "Sir, the parade is formed." The bat-talion commander orders, "Take your post." Theadjutant passes by the battalion commander's rightand takes his post on the right side of the staff.

e. The battalion commander then commandsORDER, ARMS, and gives such movements in themanual of arms as he may desire. Officers, non-commissioned officers commanding platoons, thecolor guard, and the guidon bearers, having onceexecuted order arms, remain in that position dur-ing the movements of the manual of arms.

f. The battalion commander then directs the ad-jutant, "Receive the report." The adjutant, pass-ing by the battalion commander's right, advancestoward the center of the battalion, halts midway

213

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 215: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

between it and the battalion commander, and com-mands, REPORT.

g. At the command REPORT, the companycommanders, in succession from the right, saluteand report, "_ Company, All presentor accounted for." The adjutant returns each com-pany commander's salute after the report is madeand understood.

h. After receiving the reports, the adjutant facesthe battalion commander, salutes, and reports, "Sir,all present or accounted for."

i. The battalion commander then directs, "Pub-lish the orders;." The adjutant faces the troopsand commands ATTENTION TO ORDERS. Hepublishes the orders and then commands OFFICERS,

CENTER, MARCH. He then faces about and takeshis post with the battalion commander.

j. At the command OFFICERS, guidon bearers exe-cute carry guidon.

k. At the command CENTER, when companies arein line, company commanders, officers commandingplatoons, and guidon bearers face to the center.When companies are in mass formation, companycommanders and guidon bearers face to the center.Officers commanding platoons move one step for-ward and face to the center. Officers, second incommand, move through the interval nearest tothe center and take their posts in the columnformed by the platoon leaders.

1. At the command MARCH, the band plays;officers and guidon bearers close to the center, halt,and individually face to the front; company com-manders, when moving to the center, oblique to the

214

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 216: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

front and close on a line four steps in advance ofthe line of guidon bearers. The guidon bearersclose on their own line, each taking his post inrear of his own company commander. All otherofficers close on the line of platoon leaders.

mn. The officers and guidon bearers having closedand faced to the front, the senior officer commandsFORWARD, MARCH. The center officer of the lead-ing rank is the guide. The officers and guidonbearers are halted with the leading rank six stepsfrom the battalion commander. They salute thebattalion commander, who returns the salute. Thecommand, READY, TWO is given by the battalioncommander or senior company commander for thetermination of the salute. The guidon bearers exe-cute carry guidon at the same time.

n. The movements are executed at quick time toassure simultaneous execution by the officers andguidon bearers.

o. The battalion commander gives such instruc-tion as he deems necessary and then (in quick timecadence) commands OFFICERS, POSTS, MARCH.

p. At the command POSTS, all officers and guidonbearers face about.

q. At the command MARCH, they step off. Thecenter officer of the leading rank is the guide.

r. The senior officer commands, OFFICERS, HALT.He halts the leading rank six steps from the lineof companies when companies are in line and threesteps from the line of companies when they arein mass formation. He then commands POSTS,

MARCH.

215

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 217: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

s. At the command POSTS, the officers and guidonbearers face outward.

t. At the command MARCH, the officers step offin succession at four-step intervals and resumetheir posts. The guidon bearers step off with theircompany commanders. On resuming their posts,the guidon bearers execute order guidon. Themusic ceases when the last officer has taken hispost. On resuming their posts, the officers andguidon bearers remain facing the troops and faceabout simultaneously at the command of the com-pany commander. Executive officers take theirposts without commands.

u. During the execution of officers center andofficers post, except when saluting, all guidon bear-ers remain at carry guidon.

v. The battalion commander then gives the com-mand for the battalion to pass in review. The bat-talion passes in review on the commands and inthe manner prescribed for a review. When thelast company has passed, the ceremony is con-cluded.

w. The band continues to play while the com-panies are in march on the parade ground. Afterpassing in review, the companies are marched totheir respective areas and dismissed.

130. Ceremonial Brigade Parade

a. The brigade ordinarily is formed in line ofbattalions in mass formation (fig. 55). The paradeis the same as the ceremonial battalion parade (para.129) with the following exceptions:

(1) "Brigade commander" is substituted for

216

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 218: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

"battalion commander," and "brigade," for"battalion," in the description.

(2) In moving across the front of the brigade,the band passes midway between the adju-tant and the line of battalion commanders.

b. The battalions execute present arms, orderarms, parade rests, and come to attention at thecommand of execution of their respective command-ers as described in paragraph 121. Reports aremade by the battalion instead of company com-manders.

c. At the command MARCH, of the commandOFFICERS, CENTER, MARCH, the battalion com-manders and their staffs close on the line of bat-talion commanders and staffs. The company com-manders oblique to the front and close on a linefour steps in rear of the battalion staffs. Theguidon bearers oblique to the front and close on aline four steps back of the company commanders.The other officers oblique to the front and close ona line four steps back of the guidon bearers.

131. Street Paradea. For street parades, the troops are formed and

marched in the most convenient manner. Streetparades may include transportation. Either towedor transported weapons add to the effect of a streetparade. Cargo vehicles are included only when itis desired to increase the size of the display.

b. Practical formations for street parades are-(1) Columns of threes or fours.(2) Two or more columns of threes or fours

abreast.(3) Mass formation.

217

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 219: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

c. The vehicles move in single column or columnof twos, threes, or fours as the street width permits.

d. In long street parades, the rifles may be car-ried slung over the right shoulder.

Section III. ESCORTS AND HONOR GUARDS

132. Escorts of the Color

a. When the brigade is in line, the brigade com-mander details a company to receive and escort thenational color to its place. For this ceremony, thebrigade color forms with the color guard at itspost with the brigade.

b. The band moves straight to its front untilclear of the line of battalion commanders, changesdirection if necessary, and halts. The designatedcompany takes position in column of threes (orfours) 15 steps back of the band, with the colorbearer back of the leading platoon. The 'escortthen is marched without music to the brigade com-mander's office or quarters and is formed in linefacing the entrance. The color bearer, precededby the senior lieutenant and followed by a sergeantof the escort, obtains the color.

c. When the color bearer returns, followed bythe lieutenant and the sergeant, he halts before theentrance facing the escort. The officer places him-self on the right and the sergeant; on the left ofthe color bearer. The company commander bringsthe company to present arms, and the field musicsounds To The Color. At the last note of themusic, the company commander brings the com-pany to order arms. The lieutenant and the ser-

218

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 220: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

geant salute and end their salute at the commandsof the company commander and return to theirposts.

d. The company again is formed in column, theband taking post in front of the column and thecolor bearer placing himself in the center of thespace in rear of the leading platoon. The escortthen is marched back to the brigade, the bandplaying. The march is cdnducted so that the escortarrives at a point about 50 steps in front of theright of the brigade and then moves parallel to itsfront. The brigade commander takes his post infront of the center of the brigade. When the colorarrives opposite the brigade commander, the escortis formed in line facing the brigade. The colorbearer moves to a position six steps in front of thebrigade commander and halts.

e. The brigade commander then faces the troopsand brings the brigade to present arms. He thenfaces the color and salutes. The field music soundsTo The Color. When the field music ends, he ter-minates his salute, faces the troops and brings themto the order. Following the commands of the bri-gade commander, the escort is brought to presentarms and order arms by its commander. When thetroops have been brought to the order, the colorbearer moves to his post beside the brigade colorbearer. The escort is faced to the right and, pre-ceded by the band, is marched to its place in line,moving around the left flank and back of the bri-gade. The band plays until the escort has passedthe left of the line. It then returns to its post onthe right, moving behind the brigade. The brigade

219

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 221: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

may be given the command REST after the escortpasses to the left of the line.

f. Escort of the color is executed by a battalionin a manner similar to that of the brigade.

133. Honor Guards

a. Honor guards are employed to render to per-sons of high civilian or military rank upon arrivaland/or departure from a military command, thepersonal honors to which these individuals are en-titled. Honors are not rendered between retreatand reveille (AR 600-25).

b. Honor guards of battalion size (two or morecompanies) are generally limited to personages en-titled to a salute of 17 or more guns (AR 600-25).The number of troops detailed should not be solarge as to compromise the high military standardsexpected of honor guards. Honor guards will wearthe prescribed uniform of the Army without non-regulation embellishments.

E. The commander of the installation being vis-ited, or his representatives, is the host and takespart in the ceremony as described herein. He isbriefed on the sequence of events so that he canadvise the personage to be honored of actions tobe taken during the ceremony.

d. Prior to the arrival of the personage, thehonor guard is formed in line of companies or pla-toons with the colors centered. The band takesposition to the right of and in line with the honorguard. If a saluting battery is present, its usewill be governed by the provisions of paragraph11b(3) and (4), AR 600-25.

220

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 222: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

e. Upon the first approach of the personage, thecommander of troops brings the honor guard toattention. The host welcomes the personage onarrival and escorts him to the receiving line (ifthere is one) where greetings are exchanged. Atthe conclusion of the greetings, the host escorts thepersonage to a position 10 steps in front of andfacing the commander of troops and takes positionon his guest's left. When the personage and ac-companying persons have halted in their positions,the commander of troops brings the honor guardto present arms and salutes. If the commander oftroops has a staff, the staff salutes with the com-mander.

f. As the commander of troops executes the handsalute, the band begins the appropriate honors. Ifa firing battery is employed, the first round is firedsimultaneously with the first note of the music andremaining rounds are fired at 3-second intervals.All military personnel in the vicinity of the honorguard formation, except those on security duty,salute during the firing of the cannon salute andthe rendering of honors (AR 600-25).

g. On completion of the honors, the commanderof troops gives ORDER, ARMS, salutes, and reports,"Sir, the honor guard is formed." Staffs do notsalute at this time.

h. If the personage does not desire to inspect thehonor guard, the honor guard remains at attentionuntil the personage departs.

i. If the personage indicates that he will inspectthe honor guard, the commander of troops takes aposition to his right and guides him through the

221

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 223: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

inspection. The host takes a position to the rightof the commander of troops. The band plays ap-propriate music until the inspection is completed.

j. The inspection begins at the right front of theband. The inspecting party passes along the frontrank of troops. Ranks are not opened, nor do theindividual members of the honor guard come toinspection arms, or execute eyes right.

k. The members of the inspecting party renderhand salutes or honors when they pass in front ofthe colors. W'hen the inspecting party reaches theleft front of the honor guard, it passes around therear of the formation to a point at the right frontof the band. When passing in rear of the colors,salutes will not be rendered by members of theinspecting party; however, if the visiting person-age salutes all others will conform.

1. When the inspecting party reaches the rightfront of the band, the commander of troops halts,exchanges salutes with the personage, permits thepersonage and host to pass in front of him, andreturns to his post. The host escorts the person-age back to the position in front of the honor guard.The commander of troops brings the honor guardto present arms. He and his staff salute the per-sonage, who terminates the ceremony by acknowl-edging the commander's salute. The commanderof troops commands ORDER, ARMIS, and honorguard remains at attention until the personagedeparts.

m. An honor guard ceremony upon departure ofa personage is conducted in a manner similar tothat described above. Generally, if the personage

222

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 224: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

has inspected the honor guard upon his arrival, thehost advises him that another inspection on depar-ture is not expected.

Section IV. COLORS

134. General

a. The national and brigade flags carried by or-ganizations are called the "national color" and the"brigade color." The term "color" implies the na-tional color. The term "colors" implies the nationalcolor and brigade color.

b. In garrison, when the colors are not in usethey are kept at the office or headquarters of thecommanding officer. They are escorted to and fromhis quarters or office by the color guard. In camp,when the colors are not in use, they are displayedin front of the commanding officer's tent. Whenthe weather permits, they are displayed uncasedfrom reveille to retreat. From retreat to reveilleand during inclement weather they are cased andplaced in the commanding officer's office, quarters,or tent.

c. The colors are cased when they are furled andplaced within protective covering.

d. The colors may be carried in any formationin which two or more companies participate andin escorts, when ordered.

e. In separate organizations and commands en-titled to colors and in battalions not stationed withtheir brigade headquarters, the colors are similarlycared for and displayed at the office, quarters, ortent of the commanding officer.

223

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 225: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

f. The battalions stationed with their brigadeheadquarters do not display the colors of theirorganizations.

g. At brigade formations, the colors are postedwith the brigade. When the brigade formation isbroken up, as in drill or field exercises, the colorsjoin the brigade commander or are dismissed asdirected.

A. The manual for individual colors and distin-guishing flags for general officers is the same asthat for organizational colors. Salutes by suchcolors or flags are executed from the carry as pre-scribed for a brigade color.

i. The national color renders no salute.

135. Salutes by Brigade Color

a. The brigade color salutes in military ceremo-nies while the national anthem or To The Coloris being played and when rendering honors to itsbrigade commander or to an individual of higherrank, but in no other case.

b. When marching, the brigade color saluteswhen six steps from the front of the person en-titled to the salute. It resumes the carry when sixsteps beyond him.

c. When passing in review, the color guard exe-cutes eyes right at the prescribed saluting distanceupon the command of the senior sergeant. Thecommands are: EYES, RIGHT, and READY, FRONT.When the grade of the reviewing officer entitleshim to the honor, the brigade color salutes at thecommand RIGHT and resumes the carry at thecommand FRONT. The man on the right flank

224

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 226: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

of the color guard does not execute eyes right. Inthose organizations which do not execute eyes rightin passing in review, the color guard omits thiscompliment. Where applicable, the brigade colorsalutes at the command of the senior, who com-mands COLOR, SALUTE. The return to the carryis made at the command CARRY, COLOR.

136. Color Guard

a. The color guard consists of two sergeants andtwo privates selected by the brigade commander.A position on the color guard is one of honor.Members of the color guard, when not engaged inthe performance of their duties, join their organi-zations. The senior sergeant carries the nationalcolor and commands the color guard. He gives thenecessary commands for the movements and forrendering the colors. The brigade color is placedon the left of the national color.

b. When battalions carry the color, a sergeantacts as color bearer and two experienced privatesselected by the battalion commander act as membersof the color guard. The general rules prescribedfor the brigade color guard are applicable to thebattalion.

c. The color guard is formed and marched inone rank at close interval, the bearers in the center.The color guard does not execute to the rear march,about face, or fix bayonets.

d. At the command of the senior sergeant, theprivates of the color guard present arms, or, ifarmed with the pistol, execute the hand salute onreceiving and parting with the colors. After

748-141 0 - 64 - 15 225

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 227: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

having parted with the colors, the guard is broughtto order arms by command of the senior remainingmember who is placed as the right flank man ofthe guard. WAC guards (unarmed) execute thehand salute.

e. Having received the colors, the senior sergeantconducts the guard to its proper position beforethe color company. Having parted with the colors,the guard is dismissed by the senior sergeant.

f. At drills and ceremonies in which the colorsare to participate, except escort of the colors, thecolors are received by the color company before theformation of the battalion. The color company re-ceives the colors as follows: The color company isformed, its commander facing the front. The colorguard, guided by the senior sergeant, approachesfrom the front and halts at a distance of 10 stepsfrom' the company commander. The companycommander then faces his company and brings itto present arms, faces the colors, and salutes. Hethen faces his company and brings it to orderarms. The privates of the color guard executepresent and order arms with the color company.The color guard then is marched by the senior ser-geant directly to its post. It takes its post on theleft when the company is in line or mass and inrear when the company is in column. When thecolor company joins the battalion, the color guardtakes its appropriate post in the battalion forma-tion. When the color battalion joins the brigade,the color guard takes its appropriate post in thebrigade formation.

g. When in formation, the color guard executes

226

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 228: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

at ease and rest with the color company, keepingthe pikes of the colors vertical. It executes rightshoulder, order, and present arms with the colorcompany, but remains at order during executionof the manual of arms.

h. During an inspection, the color guard does notcome to the position of inspection arms as the in-specting officers approach, nor do the inspectingofficers actually inspect the color guard's weapons.

i. When it is desired to dismiss the color guardat the conclusion of a drill or ceremony, it proceedsfrom its position and halts 10 steps in front of andfacing the commander of the color company. Thecompany presents arms. The color guard then es-corts the colors to the office, quarters, or tent of thecommanding officer. The color guard is dismissedfrom organizations smaller than a company (fu-neral escort) in a similar manner.

j. In a campaign, before an engagement of thebrigade, the colors are stored as directed by thecommanding officer.

k. After the playing of the national anthem orTo The Color, during the presentation of decora-tions and awards, the troops are brought to orderarms. On this command, by the commander oftroops, the color guard returns to the position ofright shoulder arms.

137. Movement of the Color Guard to the Rear,Right, or Left

a. To face the color guard to the rear (fig. 58),the command is COLORS, REVERSE, MARCH. At thecommand MARCH, each man steps off simultane-

227

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 229: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

1 FULL STEP & 3 HALF STEPS

I…i II1 FULL STEP & 3 HALF STEPS IN

L-- -- L-- 1

! r: I

_ 3_1j1 __2_j

2 HALF STEPS

_ " _..., I II/ I

LEGEND

X COLOR GUARDS

B UNIT COLORS

E NATIONAL COLORS

ORIGINAL DIRECTION

NEW DIRECTION

Figure 58. Movement of the color guard to the rear.

228

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 230: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

ously and executes the following movements: Num-ber 1 takes two steps forward, faces to the left inmarching, takes one full step and three half steps,faces to the left in marching, and takes two stepsin the new direction. Number 2 faces to the leftin marching, and faces to the left while markingtime. Number 3 takes one step forward, faces tothe right in marching, takes two half steps, facesto the right in marching, and takes one step in thenew direction. Number 4 takes one step forward,faces to the right in marching, takes one full stepand three half steps, faces to the right in marching,and takes on step in the new direction. Numbers2, 3, and 4 mark time after completing their move-ments until all men are abreast, then step off to-gether or halt as the case may be.

b. The color guard faces to the right (left) byexecuting a right (left) turn and inclining to theleft (right) until they are centered on the elementto their front.

138. Position of the Color at the Order

At the order, rest the heel of the pike on theground and touching the outside of your rightfootgear opposite the ball of your right foot. Withyour right hand at a convenient place on the pike,clasp it with your thumb, back of your hand to theright, and hold it in a vertical position.

139. Position of the Color at the Carry

At the carry, rest the heel of the pike in thesocket of the sling, grasp the pike with your righthand at shoulder height, with the pike inclinedslightly to the front

229

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 231: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

140. Position of the Color at Parade Rest

a. Execute parade rest with the color similar toparade rest with the rifle, but keep the pike vertical.

b. Resume the order at the command ATTEN-TION.

c. Execute the order and parade rest with thecolor company.

141. Position of Brigade Colors at Color Salute

Assume this position from the carry by slippingyour right hand up the pike to the height of youreyes, then lowering the pike by straightening yourarm to the front. When the brigade color saluteswith troops who execute present arms from theorder, assume the position of carry at the com-mand ARMS, and then execute the color salute.

Section V. FUNERALS

142. General

a. Military funerals are divided into the threefollowing classes:

(1) With chapel service, followed by themarch to the grave or place of local dis-position with the prescribed escort.

(2) Without chapel service, the funeral pro-cession forming at the entrance to (or ata point within a reasonable distance of)the cemetery.

(3) With graveside service only.b. A full military funeral normally consists of

the following elements:(1) Band.

230

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 232: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

(2) Escort appropriate to the grade of the de-ceased, including a firing squad and bugler(AR 600-25).

(3) Colors.(4) Clergy.(5) Caisson and active pallbearers.(6) Caparisoned horse (if the deceased was a

member of a mounted unit).(7) Honorary pallbearers.

c. The services of an Army chaplain are providedunless the family of the deceased (or its represen-tative) requests some other clergyman to officiate.A civilian clergyman may be substituted for or actin conjunction with the Army chaplain. The de-sires of the family are given the fullest considera-tion possible in the selection of elements involved,but the funeral is conducted as prescribed in thismanual.

d. The commanding officer or his representativeassists in making the funeral arrangements andsupervises the conduct of the funeral.

e. When honorary pallbearers are desired, theyare selected by the family of the deceased or itsrepresentative, or when the family or its represen-tative so desires, by the commanding officer.

f. At a military funeral, all persons in the mili-tary service in uniform attending in their indi-vidual capacity will face the casket and executethe hand salute at any time when the casket isbeing moved, while the casket is being loweredinto the grave, during the firing of the volley, andwhile taps are being sounded. Honorary pallbear-ers in uniform will conform to these instructions

231

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 233: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

when not in motion. Military personnel in civilianclothes, in the above cases and during the serviceat the grave, will stand at attention, uncovered,and hold the headdress over the left breast. Dur-ing the prayer, all personnel bow their heads.

g. When arms are presented at the military fu-neral of a person entitled to personal honors, theprescribed ruffles and flourishes are sounded. Thisis followed immediately by the national anthem (orTo The Color), or the march prescribed for thegrade of the deceased, except when arms are pre-sented at the close of the benediction at the grave(AR 600-25).

h. The word "chapel" is interpreted to includethe church, home, or other place where services areheld, exclusive of the service at the grave.

i. The word "casket" is interpreted to include areceptacle containing the cremated remains of thedeceased.

143. Funeral with Chapel Service

a. Before the beginning of the service, the fu-neral escort is formed in line facing the chapel.The band forms on the flank toward which it isto march.

b. Members of the immediate family, relatives,and friends of the deceased are requested to enterthe 'chapel and be seated before the casket is takenin. Members of the immediate family and relativesoccupy front seats on the right of the chapel.

c. The conveyance bearing the remains to thechapel should arrive in front of the chapel a fewmoments before the time set for the service. Since

232

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 234: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the casket normally is covered with the nationalcolor, the escort is called to attention and the escortcommander salutes as the conveyance passes. Whenall is in readiness to move the casket into thechapel, the commander of the escort brings theescort to PRESENT, ARMS. At the commandARMS, the band renders honors, if appropriate,followed by a hymn. At the first note of the hymn,the casket is removed from the conveyance by theactive pallbearers and carried between the ranksof honorary pallbearers, if any, into the chapel.As soon as the casket enters the chapel, the bandceases to play. The escort then is brought to theorder and given at ease.

d. When honorary pallbearers are present, theyare formed in two ranks, each facing the other,forming an aisle from the conveyance to the en-trance of the chapel. At the first note of themusic, and while the casket is being borne betweenthe ranks of honorary pallbearers, they uncover orsalute as prescribed in paragraph 142. They thenfollow the casket in column of twos and occupypews to the left front.

e. When the casket has been placed upon thechurch truck, the active pallbearers form behindthe honorary pallbearers and are seated behindthem. When there are no honorary pallbearers,the active pallbearers follow the casket in columnof twos and occupy the pews to the left front.

f. The funeral director (or in his absence, thechaplain's assistant) moves the church truck aspreviously arranged by the chaplain. If there isno church truck, the active pallbearers carry the

233

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 235: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

casket as instructed by the chaplain before theservice.

g. After the chapel service, the active pallbearersfollow the honorary pallbearers or, if no honorarypallbearers are present, they follow the chaplain incolumn of twos as the casket is moved to the en-trance of the chapel. The honorary pallbearersagain form an aisle from the entrance of the chapelto the caisson or hearse and uncover or salute asprescribed. When the casket has been placed onthe caisson, they enter their conveyances. Whenmarching they form columns of files on each sideof the caisson, the leading member of each columnopposite the front wheels of the caisson.

h. The casket, followed by the family group, ismoved to the entrance immediately behind the hon-orary pallbearers and active pallbearers. As soonas the honorary pallbearers have taken their posi-tions, the active pallbearers carry the casket to thecaisson and form in column of twos behind it. Ifthe honorary pallbearers do not march, the activepallbearers form files on each side of the caisson,the leading member of each column opposite thefront wheels of the caisson. The family groupremains at the chapel entrance until the honorarypallbearers have broken ranks to enter their con-veyances or have taken their positions at the cais-son. The members of the family group then areguided to their conveyances.

i. When the casket appears at the entrance of thechapel at the conclusion of the service, the funeralescort and band repeat the procedure as prescribedfor entering the chapel. The band ceases playing

234

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 236: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

and the escort is brought to the order when thecasket has been secured to the caisson.

j. The procession is then formed in the followingorder:

(1) Band.(2) Escort, including colors, firing squad, and

bugler.(3) Honorary pallbearers, if riding in cars.(4) Clergy.(5) Caisson and honorary pallbearers, if

walking.(6) Active pallbearers.(7) Caparisoned horse (para. 142b(6)).(8) Family.(9) Patriotic or fraternal organizations.(10) Friends.

k. When the procession has been formed, theband and escort are put in march by the escortcommander. The elements in rear conform. Theprocession marches slowly to solemn music. Whenthere is considerable distance from the chapel tothe grave, the escort, after leaving the chapel, maymarch at ease in quick time. The escort is broughtto attention in the vicinity of the grave. The banddoes not play while the escort is marching at ease.

I. As the procession approaches the grave, themarching elements move directly to their predesig-nated positions. The band and military escort areformed in line behind and facing the foot of thegrave. The other marching elements are placedas near as practicable to the grave. The firingsquad is placed so that it will not fire directly overthe mourners.

235

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 237: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mn. As soon as the caisson is halted, the honorarypallbearers are formed in two ranks, forming anaisle extending from the caisson toward the grave.When the grave is too near the road to permit thisformation, they take their position at the gravebefore the removal of the casket from the caisson.

n. When all is in readiness to move the casketfrom the caisson, the escort commander commandsPRESENT, ARMS. At the command ARMS, theband renders honors, if appropriate, followed by ahymn. At the first note of the hymn, the activepallbearers remove the casket from the caisson. Atthe first note of Taps, and until its last note hassounded, military personnel attending in an indi-vidual capacity and honorary pallbearers uncoveror salute.

o. Preceded by the chaplain and the cemeteryrepresentative or funeral director, the active pall-bearers bear the casket between the ranks of honor-ary pallbearers to the grave and place it on thelowering device. They remain in place facing thecasket. They raise the flag from the casket andhold it in a horizontal position, waist high, untilthe conclusion of Taps. As soon as the casket haspassed, the honorary pallbearers face toward thegrave and follow the casket in column of twos,followed by the family and friends.

p. When the casket has been placed over thegrave, the band ceases playing and the escort isbrought to the order. The commander of the escortthen commands PARADE, REST. The escort exe-cutes parade rest with the officers and men incliningtheir heads.

236

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 238: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

q. When the escort has been brought to paraderest, the chaplain conducts the graveside service.At the conclusion of the benediction, he moves twosteps to the side or rear.

r. When the service has been completed, the com-mander brings the escort to attention. He thencommands: ESCORT LESS FIRING SQUAD, PRESENT,

ARMS; FIRING SQUAD, FIRE THREE VOLLEYS.The firing party fires three volleys of blank car-tridges, assumes the position of present arms onthe command of the noncommissioned officer incharge, and remains in this position until the con-clusion of Taps. At the command ARMS, thebugler takes position at the head of the grave andsounds Taps immediately following the last volley.

s. At the conclusion of Taps, the rifles of the fir-ing squad are locked, and the entire escort then isbrought to the order. The active pallbearers thenfold the flag as prescribed in AR 840-10. They donot let it touch the casket which is in the ground.It then is handed to the superintendent of the ceme-tery or his representative for disposition as pre-scribed by AR 840-10. The band and escort areput in march in quick time by the escort com-mander. The other elements conform. At the firsthalt, the rifles of the firing squad are unloaded andinspected.

t. On the return march, the band does not playin the immediate vicinity of the grave. In a smallcemetery this is considered as within the cemeterylimits. In a large cemetery this is considered as adistance from the grave so short that the playingwould detract from the solemnity of the occasion.

237

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 239: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Care is exercises to avoid disturbing other funeralprocessions or services which may be passed on theroute of march.

144. Funeral without Chapel Service, but with Pro-cession and Graveside Service

a. When the escort for a military funeral formsat or near the entrance to the cemetery, the officerin charge supervises the transfer of the casket fromthe hearse to the caisson.

b. When honorary pallbearers are present, theyare formed in a single line facing the caisson. Theleading honorary pallbearer is opposite the frontwheel on the side opposite to that on which thehearse is halted. When more than 12 honorarypallbearers are present, they are formed in doublerank.

c. While the casket is being transferred from thehearse to the caisson, the escort is brought to pre-sent arms and the band plays an appropriate air.The honorary pallbearers uncover or salute as de-scribed in paragraph 142. During the transfer ofthe casket, the family and friends remain in theirconveyances.

d. The funeral procession then is formed andproceeds as prescribed.

145. Graveside Service

a. For this type of funeral (without chapel serv-ice) all elements of a military funeral except thecaisson and caparisoned horse are present and usedas described in paragraph 143. However, if troopsare not conveniently available or if the family de-

238

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 240: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

sires to eliminate other elements, the following areused:

(1) Clergy.(2) Active pallbearers.(3) Firing squad.(4) Bugler.

b. The military elements participating in a grave-side service are in position before the arrival of theremains.

146. Cremated Remains

a. When the remains are cremated and the ashesinterred with military honors, the provisions ofparagraphs 143 through 145 with necessary modifi-cations will govern.

b. For all phases of the funeral where the cre-mated remains are carried by hand, one man is de-tailed to carry the receptacle containing the ashes.Four men are detailed as flagbearers. When thereceptacle is carried from the conveyance into thechapel, from the chapel to the conveyance, or fromthe conveyance to the grave, the flagbearers followthe receptacle. The flag is folded as prescribed inAR 840-10 and carried by the leading flagbeareron the right.

c. When the receptacle has been placed on thestand before the chancel of the chapel or when it isplaced in the conveyance, the flag, folded as pre-scribed, is equipped with a casket container for thereceptacle, the open flag is laid upon the containeras prescribed for a casket.

d. When no hearse or caisson is used, suitable

239

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 241: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

transportation is provided for the receptacle bearerand the flagbearers.

e. In cases where the remains are conducted to acrematory and the ashes are to be interred withmilitary honors at a later time, the ceremony con-sists only of the escort to the crematory. Arms arepresented as the remains are borne into the crema-tory. The firing of volleys and the sounding ofTaps are omitted. When the funeral ceremony isheld at the crematory and when no further militaryhonors are anticipated, the volleys are fired andTaps is sounded at the discretion of the command-ing officer.

147. Ceremony Before Shipment of Remains

When the remains of a deceased officer or soldierare moved to a railway station or other point forshipment to a distant place for interment or finaldisposition, funeral services, modified as necessary,may be carried out as prescribed in paragraphs 133through 144. When no further military honors areanticipated at the place of interment or final dispo-sition, the volleys are fired and Taps sounded atthe discretion of the commanding officer. Whenmilitary honors are anticipated at the place of finaldisposition, the firing of volleys and the soundingof Taps are omitted.

148. Cannon Salute

a. When the funeral of a general officer on theactive or retired list who was entitled to a cannonsalute takes place at or near a military installation,minute guns equal to the number to which the offi-

240

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 242: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

cer was entitled (AR 600-25) will be fired at noonof the day of the funeral.

b. Immediately after the remains have been low-ered into the grave (upon completion of the bene-diction), a cannon salute corresponding to thegrade of the deceased (AR 600-25) will be fired,followed by three volleys of artillery, guns firingsimultaneously, or three volleys of musketry.

149. Participation of Aviation

When aviation participates in a military funeral,it is timed so that the airplanes appear over theprocession while the remains are being borne to thegrave.

150. Participation of Fraternal or Patriotic Organi-zations

a. At the request of the immediate family of thedeceased, or its representative or military organi-zations of which the deceased was a member maybe permitted to take part in the funeral service.

b. When the ritual is military or semimilitary,the rites begin immediately upon the conclusion ofthe Army religious service. When the ritual con-tains the firing of three volleys of musketry andthe sounding of Taps, the military firing squad andbugler are used. The sounding of Taps concludesthe funeral services.

c. Nonmilitary rituals by fraternal organizationsare held at the conclusion of Taps. The militaryescort is marched promptly and quietly away fromthe site of the grave at the end of the militaryceremonies.

748-141 0 -64 -16 241

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 243: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

151. Duties of the Chaplain

a The chaplain takes his position in front of thechapel before the arrival of the remains. He pre-cedes the casket when it is borne from the convey-ance into the chapel, from the chapel to the con-veyance, and from the conveyance to the grave.While the remains are being placed on the caissonor in the hearse, he stands uncovered at the rearand to the side facing the caisson or hearse. Whenhe is wearing vestments, he may, at his discretion,proceed from the chancel to the sacristy (vestry)at the conclusion of the chapel service and divest,joining the procession before it moves from thechapel.

b. When the procession is formed at the entranceto the cemetery or other point and the chapel serv-ice is omitted, he stands uncovered at the rear andto the side facing the caisson while the remains arebeing transferred from the hearse to the caisson.In cold or inclement weather, he may remain cov-ered except when reading such parts of the serviceas require him to be uncovered.

152. Preliminary Arrangements

The officer in charge of a military funeral, thecommander of the escort, and the superintendentof the cemetery or his representative visit the placesinvolved and make careful arrangements before thetime set for the funeral. They determine the posi-tions at the grave for the various elements of thefuneral, and make arrangements for traffic control.

242

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 244: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

153. Floral Tributes

a. In the absence of a funeral director, the offi-cer in charge assisted by the chaplain and such de-tails as may be required, arranges all floral tributesin the chapel and at the grave. He calls the com-manding officer for necessary transportation for theprompt transfer of floral tributes from the chapelto the grave. The conveyance bearing the floraltributes is loaded promptly at the conclusion of thechapel service. It precedes the funeral procession,moving as rapidly as practicable to the site of thegrave. The funeral procession does not move fromthe chapel until the conveyance carrying the floraltributes has cleared the escort.

b. The officer in charge is responsible for remov-ing cards and making a record that gives a briefdescription of the floral piece pertaining to eachcard. After completion of the funeral services, thecards and records are turned over to a member ofthe family of the deceased.

154. General Rules for Ceremonial Firing

a. For ceremonial firing, the firing squad con-sists of not more than seven riflemen and one non-commissioned officer in charge. The squad isformed in line before firing.

b. Rifles are loaded while locked.

c. Except during firing, after the rifles have beenordered loaded and locked, they remain loaded andlocked without command until the command UN-LOAD or INsPECTION, ARMS.

243

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 245: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

155. To Load

a. With the unit halted in any formation, thecommand is WITH BLANK CARTRIDGES, LOAD. Atthe command LOAD, each rifleman faces half rightand moves his right foot 12 inches to the right toa position that gives him a firm and steady stance.He raises or lowers the rifle, and drops it into hisleft hand, grasping it at the balance. His righthand is at the small of the stock, the muzzle heldin the air at an angle of 450 (1, fig. 59). He thenloads his rifle as prescribed in FM 23-8.

b. For instruction in loading, the command isSIMULATE, LOAD. The movements of loading areexecuted except that the handling of the cartridgesis simulated.

156. To Unload

Being in any formation, the command is UN-LOAD. At the command, the position of load istaken, and the rifle is unloaded as prescribed inFM 23-8. The chamber is closed and the ejectedclips are returned to the belt. The rifle is thenbrought to the order.

157. To Fire by Volley

a. Being in the firing formation with the riflesloaded, the command is READY, AIM, SQUAD, FIRE.For ceremonial purposes blank ammunition is used.At the command READY, the firing squad assumesthe position of load, if not already in that position.At the command AIM, the rifle is raised with bothhands to a position 45° from the horizontal. Therifle rests in the palm of the left hand and the butt

244

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 246: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

is placed and held firmly against the shoulder. Theleft hand is well under the rifle, grasping it at orin front of the balance, the right hand grasping thesmall of the stock. The right elbow is at the heightof the shoulder. The right cheek is pressed firmlyagainst the stock as far forward as possible with-out straining. The left eye is closed, the right eyelooking over the rear sight. The safety lock of therifle is pressed to its forward position with thetrigger finger. As a safety precaution, a firingsquad may find it necessary to swing the muzzle oftheir weapons to the right or left from their frontto avoid firing over the attendants assembled at thegraveside (2, fig. 59). At the command FIRE, thetrigger, is squeezed quickly. The rifle is then low-ered to the load position and reloaded.

b. To continue the firing, the command is AIM,

SQUAD, FIRE. Each command is executed as pre-scribed above.

c. To cease firing, the command is CEASE FIR-ING. Rifles not already at the position of load arebrought to that position.

245

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 247: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

C "

246i

246

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 248: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

w V

o =

0 l

0

2 I 40o "ED %)Pr Zz,

cq

247

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 249: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

CHAPTER 11

MOUNTED DRILL

Section I. GENERAL

158. General

a. The drill described in this chapter providesfor the orderly formation and movement of vehiclesin ceremonies. The formation may be modified toconform to local conditions.

b. The term "motorized units" includes armorand mechanized units and the term "company" in-cludes battery and troop.

159. Dismounted and Motorized Troops Participatingin Ceremony

When both marching and motorized troops takepart in a ceremony, it is desirable to have thevehicles move as a unit separately from the foottroops. The formation, speed of movement, andthe method of march are determined by the com-mander.

160. Disposition of Weapons

Members of motorized units fall in at formationfor drills and ceremonies in the same manner asdismounted units. When mounted in vehicles, un-

248

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 250: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

less at rest or at ease, they sit at attention and holdtheir weapons in the position of order arms. Theygrasp the handguard of the rifle just above thelower band. When armed with the carbine, theygrasp it just below the front band. The drivers,assistant drivers, and others specifically designated,place their weapons in the boots or racks providedor in any other safe and appropriate place.

161. Manual of Arms

a. When dismounted, execute the manual of armsfor foot troops. Do not execute the manual in thevehicle.

b. When armed with the rifle or carbine, take upthe positions as prescribed in paragraph 160.

c. When passing in review, all troops except driv-ers or those armed with the rifle or carbine, foldtheir arms and hold their elbows shoulder highwith right arm uppermost.

d. The officers in vehicles execute the hand salute.The men in vehicles, unless in charge of a unit ordetachment, do not salute.

162. The Commander

The mounted drill commander usually is in frontof the base element. From this position, he leadsthe unit in the desired direction and at the desiredspeed. He may, however, move to where he canbest observe and supervise his unit, leaving itsguidance to another officer.

163. Base

a. In mounted drill, any element or vehicle maybe designated as the base. Ordinarily, the base

249

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 251: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

vehicle follows the commander or conforms to hismovement. The other elements or vehicles regulateand guide on the base vehicle.

b. In mass, the right front vehicle normally isthe base vehicle. When not in mass, the right vehi-cle usually is the base vehicle in line, and the lead-ing vehicle usually is the base vehicle in the column.

c. Base elements adjust their movements to pre-vent interference with the other elements duringchanges in the formation.

164. Intervals and Distancesa. In mounted drill, the intervals and distances

may be varied to meet local conditions of terrain.The normal intervals and distances for halted vehi-cles are shown in figure 60. Moving vehicles shouldmaintain a distance of not less than 12 yards andan interval of not less than 5 yards.

b. On the command or signal OPEN or CLOSE,the intervals or distances are increased or decreased.

c. The intervals or distances are not closed whencoming to a halt unless the unit is commanded orsignaled CLOSE.

165. Speeda. In mounted drill, the leader and base elements

move at a uniform rate of speed, which usually isnot more than 15 miles per hour.

b. Other elements, when necessary, vary theirspeed gradually during movements to conform withthe base or to complete movements.

166. Formationsa. The formations described in this chapter can

be adapted to all motorized units, regardless of

250

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 252: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

type or number of vehicles. When practical, thevehicles are formed in columns or lines of approxi-mately 20 vehicles formed as a single unit. Fortactical formations, see the manual for the particu-lar type of unit concerned.

b. The formations are as follows:(1) Column. In this formation, the elements

or vehicles are placed one behind the otherand the right edges of the vehicles arealined (fig. 62).

(2) Line. In this formation, the elements orvehicles are abreast and the front edges ofthe vehicles are alined (1, fig. 60).

(3) Mass. A unit formed with two or morecolumns abreast constitutes a mass. Massesmay be grouped as follows:

(a) Line of masses. Masses abreast with 10-yard interval (1, fig. 60 and fig. 61).

(b) Column of masses. Masses placed onebehind another with 10-yard distance be-tween companies (2, fig. 60).

(c) Line of battalions in line of masses.Battalions in line of masses abreast with20-yard interval between battalions.

(d) Line of battalions in column of masses.Battalions in column of masses abreastwith 20-yard interval between battalions.

(e) Column of battalions in line of masses.Battalions in line of masses, placed onebehind another, with distances of 20yards between battalions.

(f) Column of battalions in columns ofmasses. Battalions in column of masses,

251

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 253: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

00 000 000000 000 000o o o 0o o o o0 0

5 YDS 10 YARDS

O LINE OF MASSES

Figure 60. Vehicles in mass formation.

placed one behind another, with dis-tances of 20 yards between battalions.

c. Mass formations may be used for ceremoniesor instruction by companies or larger units.

167. Vehicles Massed as a Separate Unit

When vehicles are massed as a separate unit,they are placed with respect to the foot troops asdirected by the unit commander. The distance andinterval between the vehicles and the marchingtroops is stated by the unit commander. The nor-mal distance and interval between halted vehiclesis the same as prescribed in paragraph 164.

252

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 254: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

'4'

I o 0

ETol 0

5 OYDSv'-/ 10 YDS

DDElD11l

O COLUMN OF MASSES

Figure 60-Continued.

253

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 255: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

+e I-I II -I- q]e -e L In II- II III

: LIII I I- I L i

tt+0H~0000+' -- l1 'l *

+: I 1 I1 I -i] l

o

4t4 1-1 -]LI1 1

254

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 256: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

T'~5 YDS

00U 4 El003in00 Ei10025 YDS

Figure 62. Battalion in column with companies in line.

168. Vehicles Accompanying Dismounted Troops

When forming with foot troops, vehicles form 5yards in rear of the rear line of men. The intervalbetween the vehicles depends on the frontage ofthe unit with which they are forming, but is neverless than 5 yards (fig. 63).

169. Formation at Vehicles

To form at the vehicles, from any formation, thecommands are-AT YOIR VEHICLES, FALL IN. Atthe command FALL IN, the men move to theirassigned vehicles and form as shown in 1, figure64. When there are more than five men, they formtwo or three ranks with normal distance as illus-

255

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 257: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

l STEOS

DDYRDS

OR MORE

O FOOT ELEMENTS AND TRUCKS IN LINE

HALTED: 5 YARDSMOVING: AS PRESCRIBED

O FOOT ELEMENTS AND TRUCKS IN COLUMN

Figure 63. Formation of vehicles accompanying dismountedtroops.

trated in 2, figure 64. When there are more than15 men, the number of men per rank may be in-creased. Artillery sections form as prescribed inservice-of-the-piece manuals.

170. Load Vehicles

At the command LOAD VEHICLES, the menin formation at the vehicles load their weapons andequipment under the direction of their leader.When the loading is completed, the men designatedto ride mount the vehicle and take their seats andsit at attention.

171. Unload Vehicles

With the men in the vehicles, the command isUNLOAD VEHICLES. At this command, the

256

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 258: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

40

4 YARDS

1 0

Figure 64. Formation at vehicles.

men dismount and remove their weapons and equip-ment under the direction of their leader. The unitre-forms without command as described in para-graph 169.

Section II. MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES

172. General

a. Formations While Moving. The rules fordrill of vehicles are the same regardless of theirnumber, because the vehicles of a unit normallyform in line or in column. Complicated maneuversare not executed.

b. Instruction Before Ceremonies. The forma-tion and movements are explained before the cere-

748-141 0 - 64 - 17 257

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 259: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

monies. To attain orderly formations and move-ments at ceremonies, it may be necessary to drill inthe following essential movements:

(1) Movement forward in Ime and columns.(2) Movement from column to line and from

line to column, including changes in di-rection.

(3) Movement into a mass formation from asingle column.

(4) Movement in mass formation, includingchanges in direction.

(5) Forming a single column from a mass for-mation while moving or from a halt.

173. To Start Engines

The vehicles are started at the command or signalSTART ENGINES. They are kept running untilthe command or signal STOP ENGINES is given.When the vehicles are halted during ceremonies,the engines are kept running unless the halt is pro-longed.

174. To Move Forward

The commander gives the warning signal FOR-WARD and his vehicle moves out. The other vehi-cles move forward at the designated distance (orinterval). They are alined on and follow the basevehicle.

175. To Halt

The commander orders his driver to signalHALT. The driver then slows down and haltsthe commander's vehicle. The other vehicles closeto the prescribed distance (interval) and halt.

258

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 260: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

176. To Form a Column or Line

In any formation except line or column, thecommander places his own vehicles at the base posi-tion and signals ASSEMBLE. Then he extendshis arm horizontally and points in the direction ofthe line or column on which the vehicles are toform. The other vehicles then move to position in

column or line at the prescribed distance or in-terval.

a. To Form a Column from a Line.

(1) Wheeled vehicles. The commander signalsCOLUMN, and orders his driver to givethe signal indicating whether the move-ment is to be made on the right, left, orfront. Then he has his vehicle move inthe new direction. The remaining vehicles,in succession from the right (left), turnand follow at the prescribed distance.

(2) Tracked vehicles. The commander signalsCOLUMN and orders his driver to movethe vehicle in the direction the column isto be formed (right, left, or front). Thecolumn formations are executed from anyline formation by successive movements ofthe next elements within a unit to theirpositions in rear of the forward movingbase. The base is followed alternately bythe next lower element on its right andleft. These elements begin their movementby changing their formations, if required,and moving by the most direct route totheir new positions.

259

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 261: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. To Form a Line from a Column.

(1) Wheeled vehicles. The commander signalsLINE and orders his driver to give thesignal indicating the direction the move-ment is to be made (right, left, or front).Then he has his vehicle move in the desireddirection. The other vehicles form in lineon the commander's vehicle (figs. 65 and66).

(2) Tracked vehicles. The commander signalsLINE and orders his driver to move thevehicle in the direction in which the lineis to be formed (right, left, or front).Formation in line is attained from anycolumn by a fan-shaped deployment to-ward both sides of the base. The nextelement within the unit in rear of the basemoves to the right of the base, the third tothe left; of the base, and so on alternately(fig. 65). These elements move by themost direct route without changing forma-tion until they arrive near their new posi-tions where they form a line, when re-quired. When a line is formed in anydirection other than the direction ofmarch, the head of the column is turned inthe new direction before the deploymentis ordered.

177. To Form a Single Column from a riass

The commander signals or commands COLUMNand points to the column leader who is to lead off.He then moves his own vehicle in the desired direc-

260

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.C

Page 262: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I //

\E

i/

El

Figure 65. Forming line from column in armor unit.

261

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 263: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

t-~

I I l I

E)BEING IN LINE. TO FORMCOLUMN TO THE RIGHT I

.BEING IN LINE. TO FORM"COLUMN TO THE FRONT

r- r-1 r d -

_: ._J . ,,

\\ _-----.____----J'-J

" r ----

()..BEIG IN COLUMN. TO FORMfWLINE TO THE FRONT

EBEING ,N COLUMN. TO FORMLINE TO THE LEFT

Figure 66. Moving vehicles changing direction of marchitn linte or column.

tion, followed by the leading vehicle of the desig-nated column. The leading vehicle is followed bythe remaining vehicles of that column. The othercolumns follow in succession (fig. 69).

262

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 264: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

\ \ m

Figure 67. Forming line from platoon in column with lessthan five vehicles.

Section I1i. SIGNALS

178. General

a. When conditions make oral commands inade-quate, signals are used for transmitting commandsand warnings. The signals described in this manualare the arm and hand signals used in mounted drill.

b. When a movement is to be executed by oneunit or all units of a command, a preliminary sig-nal designating the unit or units to execute themovement is given. The person giving the signalfaces the unit or units for whom it is intended.The signal is given either from the ground or froma vehicle. The signal for executing the movement

263

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 265: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

i I

Figure 68. Moving vehicles changing direction of marchin mass formation.

is given as soon. as the preliminary signal has beenunderstood.

c. One signal is preferable to a combination ofsignals. When a combination of signals is used,the signals should be easily recognizable and givenin the order in which the command is worded. Forexample, to signal ASSEMBLE IN COLUMN OFPLATOONS give the signal for ASSEMBLE,COLUMN, and PLATOONS in that order.

d. To change the formation of lower units, it is

264

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 266: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

riI l

,I

l l/ i

Figure 69. Forming a single column from a formation ofvehicles with several columns abreast.

preferable for the leader to move the base elementand indicate or signal the desired formation. Allother elements conform to the base.

179. Arm and Hand Signals

The general arm and hand signals used formounted drill are as follows:

a. ATTENTION. Extend your arm sidewardslightly above the horizontal, palm to the front,and wave toward the head several times.

265

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.C

Page 267: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. FORWARD; TO THE REAR. Face in thedesired direction of movement and raise your handvertically in the full extent of your arm, palm tothe front; lower your arm and hand to the hori-zontal in the direction of the movement.

c. BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK. Facethe unit being signaled, extend both arms horizon-tally in the direction of the desired movement.

d. MOUNT. Extend your arm downward atyour side, palm out, and raise your arm sidewardand upward to an angle of 450 above the horizontal.Both arms may be used when giving this signal.

e. DISMOUNT. Extend your arm sideward andupward to an angle of 45 ° above the horizontal,palm down, and lower it to your side. Both armsmay be used when giving this signal.

f. CLOSE FORMATION. (From turrets oftanks and open vehicles.) From the positions ofarms extended sideward, palms up, bring the armsvertically overhead until the palms touch. Repeatas necessary.

g. CLOSE FORMATION. (From cabs ofclosed vehicles.) Extend your left arm sidewardto the horizontal, palm up, and raise it as high asthe cab permits. Repeat several times.

h. MASS. Extend your arm horizontally side-ward, palm up, fingers extended and joined; then,by flexing your elbow, bring the tips of your fingersto the point of your shoulder several times.

i. EXTEND. Raise your arms vertically over-head, with your palms together. Then drop yourarms sideward to the horizontal position, palmsdown. Repeat this several times. (In a formation

266

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 268: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

possessing width and depth, extension is made inboth directions.)

j. STOP ENGINES. Draw your right hand,palm down, across your neck in a "throatcutting"motion from left to right.

k. MOVE IN-GEAR OR SPEED. Hold upthe number of fingers which indicates the desiredgear or speed.

1. MOVE IN REVERSE. Face the unit beingsignaled, extend your arm and hand at shoulderlevel, palm toward the driver, and make a pushingmotion. Repeat this several times until the vehiclehas moved to the desired position.

m. START ENGINES. Rotate your arms infront of your body, describing circles to simulatecranking.

n. COLUMN. Raise your arm vertically. Thendrop your arm to the rear and describe circles in avertical plane with your arm fully extended.

o. LINE. Raise both arms sideward to the hori-zontal.

Section IV. MOUNTED REVIEWS

180. General

a. The procedures described in paragraphs 105through 107, 120 through 127, 128 and 142 are ap-plicable to all units with vehicles, mounted or dis-mounted.

b. The national and unit colors are mounted onthe vehicle when carried in mounted formations.The color bearers and the color guards ride in thevehicle with the colors. The vehicles carrying the

267

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 269: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

colors takes its position at or near the center of theformation and in the interval between battalionsor similar elements. When the troops dismountfrom their vehicles and form into foot formations,the colors are removed from the vehicle and postedin the same relative position as for a dismountedformation.

c. In mounted formations the guidon is flownfrom the commander's vehicle.

d. Unless ordered otherwise, all vehicular weap-ons are mounted and carried with their covers re-moved. Machineguns, except for the antiaircraftweapons, are adjusted and clamped with the barrelshorizontal and alined with the axis of the vehicle.Antiaircraft mnachineguns are pointed to the leftand upward at the maximum elevation. Rifles,carbines, and submachineguns are carried in theprescribed positions.

e. All tank hatches are open. The windshieldsof the vehicles are closed. The bows and canvastops are down on all combat vehicles and vehiclescarrying personnel. The bows and canvas tops areup on the cargo-carrying vehicles. The rear cur-tains are closed and fastened. The radio antennasare secured as prescribed.

181. Preparations

The line on which the foot troops are to form ismarked. The post of the reviewing officer and theline of march are marked with flags. The review-ing stand and markers are located so that as eachunit passes in review its right flank is 20 yardsfrom the reviewing officer. When formed for bat-

268

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 270: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

talion reviews, the line of troops is 145 yards infront of the reviewing stand; however, in the caseof larger reviews, the line of unit commanders is145 yards in front of the reviewing stand (fig. 70).The band and buglers are formed dismounted andtake their post 25 yards to the left and 5 yards tothe rear of the reviewing officer. Where more thanone band is present, the additional band or bandsform on the left of the first band. The bands maybe massed. The bands play during the reviewingofficer's inspection and during the march in review.

182. Formation

a. The normal formation of the battalion forceremonies is a line of masses. However, a columnof masses may also be used. For large reviews, aline of battalions in line of masses is preferable;but where space is the controlling factor a line ofbattalions in columns of masses may be used.

b. In reviews for units larger than the battalion,the battalion commander's vehicle is 20 yards infront of the center of his unit. The commander'svehicle is centered 40 yards in front of the unit.Staff vehicles, except the second in command of acompany, form with the right flank of their line 5yards in rear of the commander's vehicle.

c. When platoon leaders and company and bat-talion commanders are dismounted, they take posi-tions six steps directly in front of their respectivevehicles.

d. Extra vehicles, administrative vehicles, andtransportation which is not a part of a combatplatoon or similar unit may be formed as an addi-

269

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 271: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

LINE OF TROOPS

LINE OF UNITCOMMANDERS

125 YDS

_INE OF MARCH

20 YDS

REVIEW£NG

25 YDS I I O F F IC E R

[I>25 YDS, 5 YDS

MAR ERSM _R- I BAND(S)

Figure 70. Preparation for mounted review.

tional column on the left of each company or simi-lar unit. It may be desirable to group the admin-

istrative and extra vehicles in columns at the leftof each battalion or other unit. When platoons

contain less than five vehicles, additional vehiclesmay be added as part of the platoon.

e. All units form and take their positions on theline of troops before the adjutant's call.

f. The reviewing officer is dismounted and gen-erally receives the review from a reviewing stand.

210

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 272: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

183. InspectionWhen the troops remain in the vehicles, eyes

right is not executed as the reviewing party ap-proaches.

184. March in Reviewa. When the reviewing officer has resumed his

post (fig. 71) after inspecting the troops, or whenhe indicates he does not desire to inspect the troops,the commander of troops commands: PREPARETO PASS IN REVIEW, MOUNT.

b. At the command MOUNT, the troops breakranks, move at double time, and mount. The en-gines are started. When the troops remain in thevehicles, the command MOUNT is not given.

c. When the commander of the troops observesthat the troops are mounted, he climbs into hisvehicle and commands, usually by radio: PASSIN REVIEW.

d. When the commander of the unit on the rightflank receives the command to PASS IN REVIEWhe gives the commands to start the MARCH. Eachsuccessive commander of a mass formation on theline of troops, in turn, gives the command to fol-low the unit on his right flank.

e. Units may march in review with their elementsin line, column, or mass. The sequence of com-mands for passing in review is as follows:

(1) Line. By the right flank is executed suc-cessively by platoons at the commandPASS IN REVIEW. Commands or sig-nals of execution are given by each platoonleader. By the left flank is executed suc-cessively by platoons to make the next

271

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 273: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

REAR ELEMENTEl El U lOF

too roe -- , - LEADING BN100 YDS LEADING BN

10 YDS

STF 0 STF[

25 YD5S -

O l25 YDS -I

o3 0 2YD 550 YDS I I REVIEWING

I5 8 El' OFFI CER

S O S -*--50 YDS ·

5 YDS

O O D25 YD5 -- >j

_ t r LEGEND25 YDS ---- STF - STAFF

El o b o p [ - MARKER

Figure 71. Passing in review (line formation mounted).

change of direction at the end of the re-view field. By the left flank is executedsuccessively by platoons to make the lastchange of direction and bring them in linefor passing the reviewing stand. Figure71 shows the formation for passing a re-viewing stand.

(2) Column. Right turn is executed succes-

272

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 274: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

sively by companies in mass at the com-mand PASS IN REVIEW. The com-mands or signals of execution are given byeach company commander. Left turn isexecuted successively by companies in massto make the last change of direction sothat the company will be in mass for pass-ing the reviewing stand.

f. Mass formation for passing in review is exe-cuted in the same manner as for a column, exceptwhen battalions are in line of masses or in line ofcompanies with companies in column.

g. Commanders of platoons and all higher unitcommanders salute as they pass the reviewing offi-cer. They begin the salute 15 yards from the re-viewing stand and hold it until they are 15 yardsbeyond it.

h. The review ends when the rear element of thecommand has passed the reviewing officer. Whenthe review is ended, the unit commanders takecharge of their unit (at a previously designatedpoint) and move them as directed in the reviewinstructions. When an inspection follows the re-view, the units move to the designated area.

185. Road Reviews

Road reviews usually are conducted in columnformation with as many vehicles abreast as thewidth of the road permits. Special instructions areissued for control of traffic, distances between vehi-cles, speeds, safety precautions, markers, andguides. To prevent traffic jams, divergent routesare designated for the units that have passed thereviewing stand.

748-141 0 - 64 - 18 273

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 275: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Section V. INSPECTION OF MOUNTED UNITS

186. General

a. Inspections may be mounted or dismounted.b. The administrative details for the inspection

of various units are limited by the variety ofarmored and motorized elements and the availableterrain. The area for the inspection is markedcarefully and lines are established to simplify theinspection. A field inspection of a large unit mayrequire an advance detail from each battalion toassist in the layout of the area. Suggested arrange-ments for field inspections are shown in figures 72and 73.

c. When all the elements are in position, the ad-jutant reports to the commanding officer who, after

HEY

SHELTER TENTS -

[ VEHICLES 2 YDLATRINE

BG & BN O O O -IO OE B OHOFFICERS' TENTS [ L] BLiR

5 YDS

T ¥DS CO OFFICERS' TENTS10 YDS

[10 no [lo & [lo OnSUPPLY&10TDS KITCHEN VEHICLES

5YDSI F ~ -25 YD5d 30 TO 50 YDS

U I II I IFigure 72. A typical formation for field inspection.

274

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 276: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

receiving the report, orders the troops to preparefor inspection.

d. When a band is present, it plays during theinspection.

e. When desired, an alternate formation may beused (fig. 73) with shelter tents pitched in linesseparate from the lines of vehicles. The shelter

20 YDS--s BG AND BN

OFFICERS' TENTS

0 O l 0 [7 E ] BN HQ5 YD$

10 YDS j COMPANY OFFICERS' TENTS

00 O E 0O0 O0 SUPPLY AND

10 YDSf KITCHEN VEHICLES

KEY

t08 &6 TO 20 SHELTER

10 TO 20 YDS TENTS

VEHICLES

LATRINE

10 TO 20 YDSI

Figure 73. An alternate formation for field inspection.

275

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 277: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

5 YDS-F F

OEKITCHEN

TRUCK -

FLY O

I A .i< BA B

LEGENDA. SERVING TABLEB. USTER BAGC. GARBAGE PITD. HOT WATERE. GREASE PITF. FUEL (IF REQUIRED)

Figure 74. A type layout for kitchen equipment.

tents may be pitched in double lines by company orsimilar unit, forming a company street. The vehi-cles are in line in extension of the street of thecorresponding company.

f. The company officers' tents are erected facingtheir respective company streets.

g. The colors are placed in front of the com-manding officer's tent. The guidon is placed at theright front of each company commander's tent.

187. Display of Equipment

a. Vehicles are displayed with hoods raised; en-gine compartments, doors, and battery boxes open;and tailgates down. The tools are displayed di-rectly in front of each vehicle.

276

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 278: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. The mounted weapons are prepared for action.The towed weapons are uncoupled, moved 2 yardsto the rear, and prepared for action.

c. Organizational equipment is displayed on theground in the rear of the vehicle. The kitchensmay be displayed as shown in figure 74. Additionalequipment not shown in figure 74 is placed underthe kitchen fly and in the kitchen truck.

d. Individual equipment, including weapons, isdisplayed in front of the shelter tents as prescribedin FM 21-15.

277

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 279: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

APPENDIX I

REFERENCES

AR 600-25 Salutes and Honors.AR 840-10 Description and Use of Flags,

Guidons, Tabards, and Auto-mobile Plates.

FM 21-5 Military Training.FM 21-15 Care and Use of Individual

Clothing and Equipment.FM 21-30 Military Symbols.FM 21-60 Visual Signals.FM 23-5 U.S. Rifle, Caliber .30, M1.FM 23-7 Carbine, Caliber. 30 M1, MiA1,

M2, and M3.FM 23-8 U.S. Rifle, 7.62-mm, M14.FM 23-15 Browning Automatic Rifle, Cali-

ber .30, M1918A2.FM 23-35 Pistols and Revolvers.FM 26-5 Interior Guard.TC 23-3 40-mm Grenade Launcher, M79.DA Pam 21-38 Escorting Deceased Army Per-

sonnel.DA Pam 108-1 Index of Army Motion Pictures,

Film Strips, Slides, and Phono-Recordings.

DA Pam 310-3 Index of Training Publications.DA Pam 310-5 Index of Graphic Training Aids

and Devices.

278

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 280: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

APPENDIX II

SYMBOLS

i DIVISION OR DIVISION COMMANDER OF TROOPS

' sncBRIGADE COMMANDER/COMMANDER OF TROOPS

BATTALION COMMANDER

COMPANY COMMANDER

i, / COMPANY COMMANDER ALTERNATE POSITION

EXECUTIVE OFFICER (COMPANY)

mi' PLATOON LEADER

ffi FIRST SERGEANT

i PLATOON SERGEANT

2f~3 SECTION LEADER

IX3 SQUAD LEADER

FIRE TEAM LEADER

ED RADIOTELEPHONE OPERATOR

W-- SQUAD MEMBER

mm DIRECTION TROOPS ARE FACING OR MARCHING

GUIDON

FI COLORS

Figure 75. Master key to symbols in illustrations.

279

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 281: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

APPENDIX III

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE Ml RIFLE

1. General

a. Execute FALL IN with the rifle at orderarms.

b. Facings, alinements, and short distancemarching movements are normally executed fromorder arms. Right (left) step, backward march,open and close ranks, and close and extend areshort distance movements. To march units forwardfor similar short distances, forward march may begiven from order arms. When these movementsare commanded while at order arms, come auto-matically to trail arms on the command of execu-tion for the movement. Return the rifle to orderarms on halting.

c. Before starting any other marching movementof armed troops, face the troops in the desireddirection of march and then bring the weapons toright shoulder, port, or sling arms by the appro-priate command. When a marching movement hasbeen completed, and it is desired to execute a facingmovement, first have the weapon brought to orderarms or unsling arms and then give the commandfor the facing movement.

280

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 282: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. When at a position other than sling arms,come to port arms for double time. When in for-mation, the commander gives the appropriate com-mands.

2. Rules for the Rifle Manual of Arms

a. The term "at the balance" refers to a pointon the rifle just forward of the trigger housing(fig. 76).

b. With your left hand at the balance, hold therifle with your thumb and fingers, including thesling in your grasp. Extend and join your fingers,forming a U with your thumb.

c. The position of the rifle known as "diagonallyacross the body" is as follows (fig. 77): the barrelis up, the heel of the butt is on line with your righthip, and the barrel is at such an angle that onepoint of the barrel is in front of the juncture ofyour neck and left shoulder. Hold the rifle at aheight which allows your right forearm to be hori-zontal when you grasp the small of the stock withyour right hand. Grasp the rifle at the balancewith your left hand as described in b above, keep-ing your left elbow at your side. The distance ofthe rifle from your body depends upon the con-formation of your body, but it should be approxi-mately four inches from your belt.

d. The cadence for rifle movements is quick time;however, in early stages of instruction, precise exe-cution is learned before acquiring the proper ca-dence.

e. The manual for the rifle is taught to be exe-cuted while standing at the position of attention.

281

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 283: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

REAR OF R cEVER OPERATING ROD ANDLE M22LE

HEEL OF BUTT FRONT HAND GUARD

BALANCEi LOCK SLING STACKING SWIVEL

BUTT SMALL OF STOER SLINGTRIGGER GUARD BAYONET STUD

TOE OF BUTT TRIGGER UPPER SLING SWIVEL

Figure 76. Drill nomenclature of the U.S. rifle, cal. .30. M1.

To add interest to drill or lessen fatigue on longmarches, movements between right and left shoul-der, and port arms may be commanded whenmarching at attention in quick time. To move therifle to the left shoulder from the right shoulderwhen marching, the command LEFTr SHOULDER,ARMS is given as the left foot strikes the ground.The first count of this movement is executed as theright foot strikes the ground and the left arm ismoving forward in its natural are. To move therifle to the right shoulder from the left shoulderwhile marching, the command RIGHT SHOULDER,ARMS is given as the right foot strikes theground. The first count of this movement is exe-cuted as the left foot strikes the ground and theright arm is moving forward in its natural arc.

f. Any position of the manual of arms may beexecuted from another position, except inspectionarms, trail arms, sling and unsling arms, and fixand unfix bayonets, which must be executed fromthe position of order arms. Port arms is the onlymovement that may be commanded from inspec-tion arms.

282

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 284: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

I

S VIi -m

I

Figure 77. Rifle held diagonally across the body.

283

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 285: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

3. Order Arms

a. Order arms is the position of the soldier atattention with the rifle. It is assumed on the com-mand SQUAD (PLATOON), ATTENTION from anyof the rest positions except fall out. Order armsis assumed on the command FALL IN and on thecommand ORDER, ARMS from any position in themanual except inspection arms and sling arms.

b. At order arms, maintain the position of atten-tion except for your right arm and rifle. Placethe butt of the rifle on the ground with the barrelto the rear and the toe of the rifle butt againstyour right shoe, on line with the front of yourright shoe. Grasp the front handguard with yourright hand in a U formed by your fingers, ex-tended and joined, and your thumb. Hold the tipsof your index finger and thumb on line with theforward edge of the front handguard. Keep yourright hand and arm behind the rifle so that yourthumb is along your trousers seam (fig. 78).

4. Rest Positions with the Rifle

The rest positions with the rifle are commandedand executed as without arms, with the followingexceptions and additions:

a. On the command PARADE, REST, keep the toeof the rifle butt on line with the front of your rightshoe, and hold the rifle butt against your rightshoe. Slide your right hand upward, regrasp thefront handguard just below the stacking swiveland straighten your right arm so the muzzle ofthe rifle is inclined straight to the front. Placeyour left hand behind your back, just below the

284

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 286: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

_l,I

Figure 78. Order arms.

285

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 287: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

( 0Figure 79. Parade rest.

belt line, with your fingers and thumb extendedand joined and your palm to the rear. Thrust therifle out at the same time you move your left foot(fig. 79).

286

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 288: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

b. Execute STAND AT, EASE, with the rifle, thesame as parade rest with the rifle, but turn yourhead and eyes toward the commander.

c. On the command AT EASE or REST, keepyour right foot in place. Hold the rifle as inparade rest, except that you may relax your rightarm slightly. When at sling arms, follow the pro-cedure outlined in paragraph 12e.

d. Armed troops must be at attention at orderarms, port arms, stack arms, or unsling arms be-fore FALL OUT may be given.

5. Trail Arms

a. When at the position of order arms, the posi-tion of trail arms is executed on the command ofexecution of a march command when no othercommand precedes the preparatory command forthe movement.

b. For instructional purposes, the commandTRAIL, ARMS may be used to teach the position ata halt. At the command ARMS, grasp the riflewith your right hand, with your fingers and thumbclosed around the front handguard. Raise the riflebutt three inches off the ground. This movementis executed in one count.

c. At the command ARMS, of ORDER, ARMS,lower the rifle to the ground with your right handand resume the position of order arms. WhenTRAIL, ARMS is commanded, hold the rifle at thetrail until ORDER, ARMS is given.

287

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 289: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

6. Port Arms

a. The command is PORT, ARMS.b. This is a two-count movement from order

arms. At the command ARMS, raise the riflediagonally across the body with the right hand,grasping the balance with the left hand so thatthe rifle is approximately four inches from thebelt. Hold your right elbow down without strain(1, fig. 80). On the second count, regrasp the riflewith your right hand at the small of the stock(2, fig. 80). At port arms, keep your right fore-arm horizontal with your elbows in at your sidesand hold the rifle diagonally across the body, ap-proximately four inches from your belt.

c. Order arms from port arms is executed inthree counts. At the command ARMS, move yourright hand up and across your body and grasp thefront handguard without moving the rifle (1, fig.80). On the second count, release your left handfrom the balance and lower the rifle to your rightside with your right hand so that the butt is 3inches from the ground. Place your left hand onthe rifle in the vicinity of the stacking swivel,fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm tothe rear, to steady the rifle and hold the barrelvertically (fig. 81). On the third count, lower therifle gently to the order with your right hand andmove your left hand to your side.

7. Right Shoulder Arms

a. The command is RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.b. When executed from order arms, right shoul-

der arms is a four-count movement. At the com-

288

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 290: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

7 v

0 0Figure 80. l'ort arms.

748-141 0 -64 -19 289

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 291: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figtrce 81. Next to last count in execluting order arms.

290

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 292: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

mand ARMS, execute the first count of port armsas described in 6b (1, fig. 82). Hold your rightelbow down without strain. On the second count,regrasp the rifle at the butt with your right hand,the heel of the butt between the first two fingersand the thumb and fingers closed around the stockwith the thumb and index finger touching (2, fig.82). On the third count, place the rifle on yourright shoulder with the grasp of your right handunchanged. Release your left hand from the bal-ance and use it to guide the rifle to your shoulderby placing your left hand at the small of the stock,thumb and fingers extended and joined, palmtoward your body, and the first joint of your leftforefinger touching the rear of the receiver. Keepyour left elbow down (3, fig. 82). On the fourthcount, move your left hand back to its position byyour side as at attention. At right shoulder arms,keep your right forearm horizontal and your rightelbow against your side and on line with your back(4, fig. 82).

c. The return to order arms is a four-countmovement. On the command ARMS, press therifle butt down quickly and move the rifle diagon-ally across your body, turning the butt so as tokeep the barrel up. Grasp the rifle at the balancewith your left hand, retaining the grasp of yourright hand on the butt (count one). On the sec-ond count, move your right hand up and acrossyour body and grasp the front handguard. Thethird and fourth counts are executed in the samemanner as the second and third counts in execut-ing order arms from port arms (para. 6c).

291

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 293: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

- 0

F'ifgure 82. Right shoulder arms.

292

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 294: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figure 82-Continued.

293

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 295: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. Right shoulder arms from port arms is athree-count movement. On the first count, regraspthe rifle at the butt with your right hand as youwould in comning to right shoulder from orderarms. The last two counts are the same as the lasttwo counts in moving from order to right shoulderarms.

e. Port arms from right shoulder arms is a two-count movement. The first count is the same asthe first count from right shoulder to order arms.On the second count, regrasp the rifle with yourright hand at the small of the stock in the positionof port arms.

8. Left Shoulder Arms

a. The command is LEFT SHOULDER, ARMS.b. In coming to left shoulder from order arms,

come to port arms in the first two counts (fig. 80).On the third count, place the rifle on your leftshoulder with your right hand, keeping your rightarm pressed against your body. At the same time,regrasp the butt with your left hand in a mannersimilar to grasping the butt with your right handin right shoulder arms (1, fig. 83). On the fourthcount, move your right hand to your side as in theposition of attention (2, fig. 83).

c. Port arms from left shoulder arms is a two-count movement. On the first count, move yourright hand up and across the body and grasp thesmall of the stock with your right hand, keepingyour right arm pressed against your body (1, fig.83). On the second count, carry the rifle diagon-ally across your body with your right hand, and

294

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 296: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

regrasp the balance with your left hand as in theposition of port arms (2, fig. 80).

d. Order arms or right shoulder arms from leftshoulder arms is a five-count movement. On thefirst two counts, bring the rifle to port arms. Onthe last three counts, go to order arms or rightshoulder arms as described in paragraphs 3 and 7.

9. Present Arms

a. The command is PRESENT, ARMS.b. Order arms to present arms is a two-count

movement. On the first count, carry the rifle tothe center of your body with your right hand, keep-ing the barrel to the rear and vertical, right elbowdown. Grasp the rifle and sling at the balancewith your left hand, forearm horizontal, and elbowagainst your body (1, fig. 84). On the secondcount, grasp the small of the stock with your righthand (2, fig. 84). The distance of the rifle fromyour body depends upon the conformation of yourbody, but it should be approximately 4 inches fromyour belt.

e. Order arms from present arms is a three-countmovement. Execute the first count by grasping therifle at the front handguard with your right hand(1, fig. 84), keeping your elbow down and at yourside. On the second count, lower your rifle withyour right hand, completing the second and thirdcounts as in order arms from port arms (fig. 81).

d. Port arms frorn present arms is executed inone count. Raise and twist the rifle with yourright hand, moving the muzzle to the left, and re-grasp the rifle at the balance with your left hand.

295

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 297: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figure 83. Counts three and four of left shouldel r nns

from order arms.

296

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 298: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

e. Present arms from port arms is executed inone count. Lower and twist the rifle with yourright hand, moving the rifle to a vertical position,and regrasp it at the balance with your left hand.

10. Inspection Armsa. The command is INSPECTION, ARMS. Inspec-

tion arms is a four-count movement, and is exe-cuted only from the position of order arms.

b. The first two counts are the same as in goingto port arms (1 and 2, fig. 80). On the third count,release your left hand from the balance and, withyour fingers closed, palm in, forearm horizontal,place your left thumb on the operating rod handleand push it to the rear until it is caught by theoperating rod catch. At the same time, lower yourhead and eyes enough to look into the receiver (fig.85). On the fourth count, having found the re-ceiver empty or having emptied it, raise your headand eyes to the front and at the same time regraspthe rifle at the balance with your left hand.

c. Port arms is the only command that may begiven from inspection arms. On the preparatorycommand, with your fingers extended and joined,palm in, place the rear edge of your right handagainst the operating rod handle and move itslightly to the rear. Then depress the followerwith your right thumb and allow the bolt to moveforward slightly, overriding the rear portion ofthe follower. At the command ARMS, removeyour right thumb from the receiver and at the sametime release the operating rod handle. Pull thetrigger with your forefinger and regrasp the smallof the stock in the position of port arms.

297

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 299: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figure 84. Prescet (t,,ms.

298

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 300: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

IF'igure 85. Third coitit of intspcctionl arms.

299

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 301: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

d. Inspection arms is executed when forming anddismissing the unit as a safety precaution.

11. Rifle Salute

a. This movement may be executed from order(fig. 86), trail, right shoulder arms (fig. 87), or leftshoulder arms. For instructional purposes, thecommand RIFLE, SALUTE may be used. The riflesalute is a two-count movement.

b. When at order arms, on the first count, moveyour left arm across your body and with your fore-arm and wrist straight, fingers and thumb extendedand joined, palm down, touch the rifle with thefirst joint of your forefinger at a point between thestacking swivel and the muzzle (fig. 86). If notin ranks, turn your head and eyes toward the per-son or color saluted. On the second count, moveyour left hand away to your side and turn yourhead and eyes to the front.

c. When saluting at trail arms, the movementsare identical with those for saluting at order arms.However, hold the rifle in the trail arms position.

d. At right shoulder arms, execute the movementby moving your left arm across your chest andtouching the first joint of your forefinger to therear of the receiver. Hold your left elbow so thatthe lower edge of your left forearm is horizontal.Hold your fingers, thumb, and wrist as describedin b above, with your palm down (fig. S87). Thesecond count of the rifle salute at right shoulderarms is similar to the return from the rifle saluteat order arms.

e. At left shoulder arms, execute the movement

300

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 302: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

by moving your right arm across your chest andtouching the first joint of your forefinger to therear of the receiver. Hold your right elbow sothat the lower edge of your forearm is horizontal.Hold the fingers, thumb, and wrist as described inb above, with your palm down as in figure 87. Thesecond count of the rifle salute at left shoulder armsis similar to the return from the rifle salute atright shoulder arms.

f. The next to the last count of right shoulderand order arms is not a rifle salute but is used forsteadying the rifle. The rifle salutes are executedwith the palm of your hand down and the side ofthe first joint of your forefinger touching the rifle.

12. Sling and Unsling Arms

a. The command SLING, ARMS is given only fromORDER, ARMS or UNSLING, ARMS. This move-ment is not executed in cadence. If the sling isnot adjusted, at the command of execution, placethe butt of the rifle on your right hip and cradlethe rifle in the crook of your right arm. Adjustthe sling with both hands and then sling the rifleon your right shoulder in the most convenientmanner. When at sling arms, grasp the sling withyour right hand, keep- your right forearm horizon-tal, and hold the barrel of the rifle vertical (fig.88). If the sling is already adjusted at the com-mand ARMS, sling the rifle in the most conven-ient manner.

b. The command UNSLING, ARMS is given onlyfrom position of sling arms. At the command ofeaecution, unsling the rifle and bring it to the posi-

301

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 303: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

F'igu,¢e 86. Rifle .sllttce (t ordcr arms.

302

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 304: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 87. Rifle satltte (it right shoultdce (tarms.

303

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 305: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

tion of unsling arms, steadying the rifle with yourleft hand. The positions of order arms and un-sling arms are the same except that at unslingarms the sling is loose.

c. Before precise movements of the manual maybe executed, the command ADJUST, SLINGS mustbe given. At the command SLINGS, tighten thesling from the position described in a above.

d. To salute while at sling arms, on the commandARMS, of PRESENT, ARMS, grasp the sling withyour left hand to steady the rifle. Keep the palmof your left hand to the rear and forearm horizon-tal. At the same time release the sling with yourright hand and execute the first count of handsalute, as described in paragraph 3. At the com-mand ARMS, of ORDER, ARMS, move your righthand and arm to your side as in the position ofattention and then resume the original position ofsling arms.

e. Execute parade rest and at ease while at slingarms in the manner described for order arms, butkeep the rifle slung, held with your right hand.When the command REST is given, you may un-sling the rifle. At the preparatory command ofSQUAD or PLArOON, take the position of parade restat sling arms.

13. Fix and Unfix Bayonets

a. The command FIx, BAYONETS is given atorder arms.

b. At the command BAYONETS, when thebayonet scabbard is on your belt, move the muzzleof the rifle to your left front and grasp the rifle

304

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 306: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

;'I

Figure 88. Sllng a rms.

305

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 307: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

at the front handguard with your left hand. Thenunfasten the snap on the scabbard and grasp thebayonet with your right hand, as shown in figure89. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard. Glanc-ing down, turn the point of the bayonet upwardand fix the bayonet on the muzzle. Then resumethe position of order arms.

c. The command UNFIX, BAYONETS, is givenat order arms.

d. At the command BAYONETS, when thebayonet scabbard is on your belt, move the rifleto your left hand as when fixing bayonets. Glanc-ing down, grasp the handle of the bayonet withyour right hand and press the bayonet catch springwith the inside of your forefinger. Raise the bay-onet vertically until the handle is about a foot abovethe muzzle of the rifle. Then, keeping your eyeson the bayonet point, drop the point to the left,turning the back of your hand toward your body,and return the bayonet to its scabbard. Resumethe position of order arms and fasten the snap onthe bayonet scabbard with your left hand.

e. When the bayonet is carried other than on thebelt, fix and unfix bayonets in the most convenientmanner upon receiving the commands.

f. The movements are not executed in cadence.

14. To Stack Arms

a. The members of the squad stack arms fromtheir positions in line at normal interval on thecommand STACK, ARMS. After the squad countsoff, the commander designates the stackmen bynumbers before giving the command to stack arms.

306

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 308: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

F'igure 89. Withdrawccing or re1l(lpcing the bayonclt.

307

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 309: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 90. Stack artms.

Only those riflemen with other riflemen on eachside of them can be designated as stackmen.

b. At the command ARMS, the man on the leftof the stackman grasps his rifle at; the lower por-tion of the front handguard and passes it in avertical position to the right front (approximately300) to the stackman, who grasps it with his lefthand at the upper portion of the front handguard.The stackman places the butt of the rifle betweenhis feet, with the barrel to the front, muzzle out-ward, and with the thumb and forefinger of hisleft hand raises the stacking swivel. He thenswings the butt of his own rifle two feet in frontand six inches to the right of his right toe (2, fig.

308

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 310: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 90-Continued.

90). At the same time, he shifts his right handto the stacking swivel of his rifle. The stackman'srifle is on the right.

c. The man on the right of the stackman stepsto the left with his left foot, keeping his right footin place. At the same time he bends to the leftfront, regrasping his weapon with his left handat the front handguard and his right hand at thesmall of the stock. He then slides his left handup to manipulate the stacking swivel, engaging itwith the free hook of the swivel on the stackman'srifle (3, fig. 90). He rotates the rifle outward sothat the barrel rests in the angle formed by theother two rifles and above the bayonet stud on theleft rifle (5, fig. 90). He pulls the butt toward him

309

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 311: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Illy I

Figure 90--Continued.

until the stack is tight and the butt is in line withthe butt of the rifle between the stackman's feet.He then lowers the butt to the ground and resumesthe position of attention (4, fig. 90).

d. Other rifles, carbines, or automatic rifles arepassed to the nearest stack on the right. Whenpassing extra rifles to the stack, grasp the fronthandguard with your right hand and, holding therifle vertical, fully extend your arm to your rightfront as shown in 1, figure 90. When the man onyour right has grasped the rifle at the balance withhis left hand, release your right hand and resumethe position of attention. When you have receiveda rifle from the man on your left, keep it verticaland move it in front of you, with your left hal.d

310

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 312: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 90-Continued.

at the balance; grasp the front handguard withyour right hand and, if you are not the stackman,pass it to your right as described above. If youare the stackman, place the rifle on the stack, trig-ger guard outward, at a sufficient angle from thevertical to keep it in place.

15. To Take Arms

a. The squad, in position in line behind thestacks, takes arms at the command TAKE, ARMS.

b. At the command ARMS, the stackman passeseach extra rifle toward its bearer. The rifles areheld in the manner described for passing them tothe stack (left hands at the balance; right handsat the front handguard). When the weapons are

311

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 313: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figure 90-Continued.

received, their bearers resume the position of orderarms.

c. When the extra rifles have been passed, thestackman grasps his rifle and the rifle of the manon his left. The man on the right of the stackmansteps to the left as in stacking, secures his rifle,and resumes the position of order arms.

d. The stackman then disengages the two re-maining rifles, grasps the left rifle at the lowerpart of the front handguard and passes it to hisleft front. The man on his left grasps it at thefront handguard with his right hand and lowersthe rifle to the ground, resuming order arms. The

312

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 314: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

stackman resumes order arms after the man on hisleft has received his rifle.

e. Each man comes to order arms by guiding andsteadying the piece with his left hand as in thenext to the last count of order arms (fig. 81). Ifarmed with the automatic rifle or the carbine, as-sume the position of sling arms.

313

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 315: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

APPENDIX IV

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE CARBINE

1. General

a. Except when otherwise prescribed, carry thecarbine slung over your right shoulder in a posi-tion similar to sling arms for the rifle (fig. 91).When armed with the carbine, remain at attentionduring the manual of arms.

b. During marches and field exercises, when leftshoulder arms is commanded to ease fatigue, changethe carbine to your left shoulder without cadence.

c. When at ease or rest is commanded, keep thecarbine slung unless otherwise ordered.

d. Execute parade rest with the carbine at slingarms, as described for the rifle at sling arms.

e. When armed with the carbine, give the handsalute as prescribed in paragraph 48d.

2. Inspection Arms

a. INSPECTION, ARMS is commanded when atsling arms. At the command of execution, graspthe sling with your left hand above your righthand (1, fig. 92), and lift the carbine from yourshoulder. At the same time, withdraw your rightarm from between the carbine and the sling. Grasp

314

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 316: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

the small of the stock with your right hand andbring the weapon across your body as in port armswith the rifle. Press the magazine lock to the leftwith the forefinger of your right hand and, at thesame time, withdraw the magazine from the re-ceiver with your left hand. Insert it behind yourbelt in front of your left hip with the open enddown and the front of the magazine to the right(2, fig. 92). Assume the position of port arms,which is similar to that for the rifle. With theforefinger of your right hand, pull the operatingslide all the way back and press down on the oper-ating slide stop with your right thumb, locking theoperating slide in its rear position. At the sametime, lower your head and eyes to glance into thereceiver (3, fig. 92). Having found the chamberempty or having emptied it, raise your head andeyes to the front and regrasp the small of thestock in the position of port arms.

b. Inspection arms with the carbine is not a pre-cision movement and is not executed as part of themanual of arms with the rifle, except when yourunit is formed and dismissed, or for an inspectingofficer.

c. At inspection arms, the only command isPORT, ARMS. At the preparatory command PORT,

pull the operating slide to the rear with your rightforefinger to disengage the operating slide stop.At the command ARMS, release the operatingslide, pull the trigger with your forefinger, andregrasp the small of the stock with your right hand.Replace the magazine with your left hand andresume port arms (4, fig. 92).

315

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 317: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Fli/rle .91. Sling arims .with the carbine.

316

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 318: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

0 0Figsurc 92. Inlspection atrms.

317

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 319: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

w

f 0

Figure 92-Continued.

318

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 320: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

3. To Resume Sling Arms

a. Execute SLING, ARMS on the commands ORDER

(RIGHT SHOULDER), ARMS after INSPECTION.

ARMS, and PORT, ARMS have been given.b. At the command of execution, grasp the sling

with your left hand, thrust your right armthrough the sling, and assume the position of slingarms. This movement is not executed in cadence.

319

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 321: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

APPENDIX V

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE BROWNINGAUTOMATIC RIFLE

1. General

a. Except when otherwise prescribed, carry theautomatic rifle slung over your right shoulder ina position similar to that prescribed for the rifle(fig. 24).

b. During marches and field exercises, when leftshoulder arms is commanded to ease fatigue,change the automatic rifle to your left shoulderwithout cadence. Otherwise, remain at sling armsduring the manual of arms, except for inspectionarms when your unit is formed and dismissed.

c. When AT EASE is commanded, keep the au-tomatic rifle slung unless otherwise ordered.

d. When REST is commanded, you may un-sling the automatic rifle. When the preparatorycommtand SQJAD or PLATOON is given, sling the auto-matic rifle and come to parade rest.

e. When PARADE, REST is commanded, keep theautomatic rifle at sling arms. Execute the positionas with the rifle (para. 48e).

f. When armed with the automatic rifle, give thehand salute as described in paragraph 48d.

320

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 322: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Figutre 93. hIspection arms with the automatic rifle.

321

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 323: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

2. Inspection Arms

a. INSPECTION, ARMS is commanded when atsling arms. At the command ARMS, grasp themagazine with your left hand and release the mag-azine catch with your right hand. Withdraw themagazine with your left hand and place it in yourbelt, open end down, the front of the magazinetoward the right. Pull back the operating handlewith your left hand to cock the piece and thenslide the operating handle forward. Regrasp themagazine and hold it in the palm of your left hand(fig. 93).

b. At the commands INSERT, MAGAZINE orPORT, ARMS, pull the trigger on the preparatorycommnand. On the command of execzttion, replacethe magazine and resume the position of sling arms.

322

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 324: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

INDEX

Para-graphs Pages

Attention, position __-_---------------------- 20 2, 4

Battalion:Formations ---------------------------- 111 178Forming in column --------------------- 112 180Forming in line with companies:

In line ________________------------- 113 180In mass --------------------------- 114 183

Forming in mass ----------------------- 115 183To dismiss ----------------------------- 116 174

Battalion-brigade:Commands and orders ------------------ 109 175Staff -___------------------------------- 110 176

Brigade:Formations ____------------------------ 117 184To form ________------------------------ 118 185To dismiss --__------------------------- 119 188

Cadence ----------------------------------- 14 17Ceremonies:

Colors --------------------------------- 134 223Definition ____-------------------------- 120 189Escorts _________----------------------- 132 218Formation of troops -------------------- 121 190Honor guards -------------------------- 133 223Inspection _______-_----_ __-------------- 124 200March in review -_---_------------------ 126 206Parades -------------------------------- 128 211Presentation and honors ---------------- 123 197Retreat -------------------------------- 127 210Reviewing party ------------------------ 122 196

323

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 325: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Para-graphs Pages

Colors:Guard __________________________________ 136 225Movement of color guard --_-_____------- 137 227Position:

Parade rest ________________________ 140 230The carry -_________________________ 139 229The order _________________-________ 138 229

Salutes by brigade _________________-____ 135 224Commands:

Directives ____________…_-__________--- __ 9 14Of execution -__________________________ 7 12Preparatory --__________________________ 7 12Supplementary _________________________ 8 13

Commands, mass -__________________________ 16 19Command voice -_---________________________ 6 10Company:

Aline a mass formation ---_______--- ___- 100 158Alining a company ______________________ 91 150Change direction of march __-___________ 96 155Change interval ________________________ 97 156Change direction when in mass __________ 101 158Commands _____________________________ 90 149Correcting distance _____________________ 104 161Dismissing a company __________________ 92 152Forming a company ____________________ 91 150Forming column from mass _____________ 102 159Forming column of platoons ________-____ 103 160Forming in column from line__ ._______ 95 154Forming in mass when in column _______ 99 157Open and close ranks ___________________ 94 154Posts for key personnel -________________ 89 142

Conduct of instruction ________________.… _____ 4 6

Drill, competitive exercises _______________--- 5 9Drill terms:

Base -_____-______________________.._____ 62 100Column ___________________________.-- -_ 62 100Cover __________________________________ 62 100Depth _________________________________ 62 100Distance _______________________________ 62 100

324

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 326: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Para-graphs Pages

Double time _____--_____________________ 19 24Element ________--______________________ 19 24Explanation _- ________-___________-____ 2 4File ____--- ____-- ___---___---___---____ 62 100Flank __________________________________ 62 100Formation -____-- ___--- _____- ___---____ 62 100Front __________________________________ 62 100Guide __---___---- __---- __----__---____- 77 126Head -------_---------------___--- ___-- 62 100Interval ______________.. - -_________________ 62 100Line _________________--_________________ 62 100Measurements ---_-__--- ________________ 62 100Platoon base ----_-------_________--____ 77 126Platoon column -__----- ________________ 77 126Platoon line ___________________________ 77 126Post __-------------------------------- - 77 126Quick time ------_-----______- -_____ ____ 19 24Rank ________________--_________________ 62 100Step ------_-----_________________ ______ 19 24

Escorts _____________________________________-- 132 218Facings at halt _____________________________ 22 27Funerals:

Arrangements, preliminary ____________ - -152 242At graveside ----____-- ______________144, 145 238Aviation participation _______________ - -149 241Cannon salute ________--_________________ 148 240Chaplain, duties ______--_________________ 151 242Cremated remains ______________________ 146 239Description ________________--____________ 142 230Firing:

By volley ---_____ -_________________ 157 244Load --___--- ____-- ____- _______ _____ 155 244Unload _____________________________ 156 244

Firing ceremonial ______________________ 154 243Floral tributes ____________--____________ 153 243Fraternal-patriotic organizations __--____- 150 241Shipment of remains __--________________ 147 240With chapel service __--________________ 143 232With procession -_______________________ 144 238

325

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 327: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Para-graphs Pages

Grenade launcher, manual of arms:Inspection arms ____-__________.______-- 54 85Sling arms ________-__________________-- 55 86

Guidon, manual of arms:Carry guidon ---- __----- __---- __----- -_ - 59 95Order guidon __________________________- 57 92Present guidon _______________________-- 60 95Raise guidon ___________________________ 58 94

Hand salute ---------__________-____________ 23 28Honor guards -__---____--- ___---___---- _ ___ 133 220

Inspection _____-___________________________. 124 200Inspections:

Battalion --__-____________-_____-_______ 107 171Company __-__________________________-- 106 162

Marching:Backward ______________________________ 29 36Change step __---___--- ___---- __----__-- 31 37In place __..___________________________- 27 35In place, double time -____-___________-- 34 38Opposite direction ______________________ 30 37Rest movements _______________________- 35 3910-inch step --------_------_.---- ------- 28 3615-inch step __----------__-__ ----------- 26 3430-inch step -.-------------------______ 25 34

36-inch step __-_________________________ 33 38March in review ------------ ________-- - 126 206Mounted drill:

Arm and hand signals _________________- 179 265Base ___-- __.____________________________ 163 249Disposition of weapons ___-______________ 160 248Formations -____________________________ 166 250Inspections -__-______________________186, 187 274, 276Intervals and distance __________________ 164 250Manual of arms ________________________ 161 249Participation in ceremonies -___________- 159 248Reviews:

Inspection _________________________- 183 271Formation ------- --________________ 182 269

326

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 328: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Para-graphs Pages

March in review -------------------- 184 271Preparations -_--------------------- 181 268Road reviews __-------------------- 185 273

Speed ---------------------------------- 165 250The commander ______________________-- 162 249Vehicles:

Accompanying dismounted troops ---- 168 255Formation ----- _-_-_--------------- 169 255Load -_---------------------------- 170 256

Massed as separate unit ________-_____-- 167 252Movement:

Forming column from mass ---- 177 260Forming column or line -_-_---- 176 259Forward ---_------------------- 174 258Halt -------------------------- 175 258Start engines __________________ 173 258

Numbers, by the --------------------------- 5 9

Oral examinations -----------------------_ 5 9

Parades _.-- __-_---------------------------- 128 211Parades, types:

Battalion _-_-_-_------------------------ 129 211Brigade -------------------------------- 130 216Street ---------------------------------- 131 217

Pistol, manual of arms:Inspection arms -_._._------------------ 51 80Return _----_---------------------------. 52 84

Platoon:Aline the platoon ----------------------- 82 133Applicable squad drill __________________ 79 130Change direction in column ____-----_--- 84 135Change interval in column -_------------ 84 135Form a column of twos, fours _________-- 87 189Form a file and re-form from a halt _____ 86 137Formations ----------------------------- 80 131Form for shelter tents __-----------_.---- 88 140Form the platoon _______-- _------------ 81 132Open and close ranks ________---_--- .---- 78 127

327

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 329: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

Para-graphs Pages

Rules for guide -_--------____--- _-_---- 78 127Presentation and honors ____________________ 123 197

Rifle, manual of arms:Fix and unfix bayonets --___-- _______--- 49 74Inspection arms -___________-________--45, 46 66, 67Left shoulder arms _____--__________---- 43 55Order arms __________________________--_ 38 45Part arms ---____________________________ 41 51

Present arms ____--_____________________ 44 61Rest positions ____________-------------- 39 45Right shoulder arms ___________________--- 42 51Rules ___________________--____________ 37 41Salute -___________________________----- 47 72Sling and unsling arms ___--____________ 48 73Trail arms ________--- --------------------- 40 47

Rests at halt ______________________________--- 21 26Retreat __---___--- ___-________________----- 127 210Reviewing party ----------.----------------- 122 196

Steps and marchings ______________________--- 24 33Squad:

Drill --__________.________________________ 64 103Formations ________________--___________ 63 103Interval change ______________________--_ 66 105March to the flank _____________________ 70 112To aline _______________________________ 67 108To change direction _______________-- ___ 69 110To count off ____________________________ 71 112To dismiss _____________________________ 65 105To form a column of twos ______________--- 74 123To march in column ___--_____________-- 68 110To march to the oblique ________________ 75 124To stack arms -______________--___-_-__ _ 72 113To take arms __________________________ 73 121

Technique of instruction -_________________-- 5 9

Voice:Control - …______________________________ 11 14Distinctiveness _________________________ 12 15Inflection ____________________________- - 13 16

328

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.

Page 330: 3 FM 22-5 manuals/1964 US Army... · 3 ncopy fm 22-5 department of the army field manual drill and ceremonies headquarters, department of the army july 1964

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

Official: HAROLD K. JOHNSON,

General United States Army,Chief of Staff.

J. C. LAMBERT,Major General, United States Army,The Adjutant General.

Distribution:

Active Army and USAR: To be distributed in accord-ance with DA Form 12-9 requirements for DAAdministration-A.

NG: D.

*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1964 0--748-141

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, United States GovernmentPrinting Office, Washington, D.C., 20402 - Price $1.00

329

WWW.SURVIVALEBOOKS.